Home

2016 Dodge Challenger SRT/Hellcat Owner`s Manual

1. CONTENTS A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS 12 Arm The System 19 Keyless Push Button Ignition 12 To Disarm The System 20 SRI Key FObS oa ces coe ee es 13 Security System Manual Override 21 Ignition Or Accessory On Message 15 E ILLUMINATED ENTRY prcs dc eR angarsa 21 B SENTRY KEY iiu bk EXER ARRIERE Seda 16 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY 22 Replacement Keys 17 To Unlock The Doors 22 Customer Key Programming 18 To Lock The Doors 23 General Information 18 To Unlatch The Trunk 24 B VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM 19 O Using The Panic Alarm 24 Rearming Of The 19 Programming Additional Transmitters 24 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Transmitter Battery Replacement 25 General Information 26 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED ERREUR 27 How To Use Remote 27 B DOOR LOCKS 30 Manual Door 30 Power Door Locks 32 KEYLESS ENTER N GO 33 B
2. Se Ra da 530 Front Power Distribution Center Fuses 531 Rear Power Distribution Center Fuses 536 B VEHICLE STORAGE 542 B REPLACEMENT BULBS i2cxd Rn 542 BULB REPLACEMENT 544 Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp Models with Halogen Headlamps If Equipped 544 Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp and Park Turn Lamp Models with High Intensity Discharge HID Headlamps If Equipped se cscs acoes heed aed Rs 545 Front Rear Side Marker Lamp 546 Tail Turn And Stop Lamp 546 Center Tail Backup Lamp 546 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL 546 License 546 FLUID CAPACITIES 547 Fluid Capacities 621 547 Fluid Capacities SRT 6 4L 548 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND Engine s e voy Ade ated 550 GENUINE PARIS naue eR RR 549 Important Information 549 492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 6 2L SUPERCHARGED 1 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 2 Remote Jump Start Negative Battery Post 3 Intercooler Fluid Reservoir 4 Eng
3. Service FCW Warning s sss dr EQUIPPED ux Ae Seis BK SE ER n 184 184 ParkSense Warning Display 185 ParkSense 185 Enabling And Disabling 189 Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist SYSTE acia e ha e dee 190 Cleaning The ParkSense System 190 ParkSense System Usage Precautions 191 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED p era iner ead i 192 E OVERHEAD CONSOLE 195 Courtesy Reading Lights ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Sunglasses Storage 196 Closing Sunroof 206 ll GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED 196 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 206 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink 197 Pinch Protect Programming A Rolling 197 Venting Sunroof Express Programming Non Rolling Code 199 Sunshade 207 Canadian Gate Operator Programming 201 Wind Buffeting cde ER 207 Using Homelink
4. 40 INDEX 591 Distribution Center Fuses 536 Door Locks 32 8 22 dann 28 ORE IPSOS 111 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 208 Seals ree spa dep EE GP E 124 PURIS UM NN TETTE OT TRE 204 Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 151 WindOWS EGG EX GE oon da 38 Power Seats DOWD ha ORG aed oo Perd CR ps 125 Forwatfd s soi 4 ka 124 Power 125 R arward wea de da ane aes 124 Hes Ha doa aa 125 UD eu ES was 125 Power Steering Fluid 549 551 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts 52 Pretensioners Seat 52 Programmable 269 Radial Ply Tires secre 3 REPRE Rn 434 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 516 Radio Operation 555255 XR igh 322 Radio Remote 320 Radio Sound 319 Rain Sensitive Wiper System 148 Rear Camera 2 aue deg ES 192 Rear Cupholder 213 Rear ParkSense System 184 Rear Seat 133 Rear Window
5. 202 Sunroof 207 DeCUEIly e ido dues pit Roo do a 203 Ignition 208 Troubleshooting 203 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS 208 General 204 M CUPHOLDERS 212 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED 204 Front Cupholders 212 Opening Sunroof 206 Rear Cupholders 213 Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 206 IM STORAGE nega eau 214 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Glove Compartment 214 W REAR WINDOW FEATURES 216 Console Storage 2222 9998 5 215 Rear Window Defroster 216 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped The mirror head can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you NOTE The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is dis abled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear view viewing The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned On or Off through the touchscreen e Push the Mirror Dimmer
6. Eng XL 8105654 Tire Rotation Tire Rotation Different Tire Size On Front And Rear Axle The suggested rotation method is the side to side as shown in the following diagram This method is required due to different size tires on the front and rear of the vehicle 442 STARTING AND OPERATING 81f10b20 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting And Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure
7. ENGINE errre 348 e Re OR Ree ed 400 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY IF FOUIPPED or RP CRUS RE 401 E PARKING BRAKE dedere Re deri 402 Manual Transmission If Equipped 402 Automatic Transmission If Equipped 403 BRAKE SYSTEM aea ducem eek 405 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 405 Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD 406 Brake System Warning Light 406 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 406 Anti Lock Brake Warning Light 408 Brake Assist System 5 408 STARTING AND OPERATING 357 Hill Start Assist HSA 409 Tire Inflation Pressures 432 Traction Control System TCS 412 Radial Ply fires 434 Electronic Stability Control ESC 412 All Season Tires If Equipped 435 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 418 Summer Or Three Season Tires If Ready Alert Braking 418 enacted Rainy Brake Support 6 419 now Tae TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 419 nb Tite 419 Tread Wear Indicators 437 Tire Identification Number
8. 130 Multifunction Lever 141 Head Restraints 131 Turn Sienals s asd Re Rr dons 142 Folding Rear Seat 133 Lane Change Assist 142 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 135 High Low Beam Switch 142 BLIGHT Ss boom d Piet 137 Flash To PaSS deae dd oo Cee eae ot 142 Headlight Switch 137 Map Reading Lights 143 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 138 Interior Lights socos 944440444294 don eke 143 Headlights On With Wipers Available With E WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS 145 me Intermittent Wiper System 146 2 ii Mist 147 RM 0 D Windshield Washers 147 Daytime Running Lights DRL If EQuIPped chad bade hase REX IPS 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only 148 Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 148 MANUAL TILT TELESCOPING STEERING 150 ll POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED 151 ll HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED ca 4 4 00 dodo 152 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED 263426
9. 462 TOWING v9 Eines 485 486 487 Emergency Trunk 42 Emission Control System Maintenance 495 cam tacts dee aa 492 493 Air Cleaner ceses s ete a ES ues 502 Block Heater ii scene eene eae 367 Checking Oil Level 498 Compartments eos dere dea o Pe IURE ead 493 Compartment Identification 492 Coolant 513 549 550 Cooling EVE eo eade ep eed 512 Exhaust Gas Caution 92 452 Fails Statt 2224244 nme ms 365 Flooded Starting 365 Fuel Requirements 448 Starting oo oae abit ed 476 478 52 ceased 498 547 548 549 550 Oil Change 498 Filler Cap epe ehem 499 22 acus tag dn sp ta 502 Selection 499 547 548 Synthetig fo ste Leas 500 Overh aUng vastat pee cm SCR RR Gd 462 MATING vesc eed MRR ios 359 Engine Oil VISCOSITY s aae doge are pod 499 504 INDEX Enhanced Accident Response Feature 66 Entry System 21 Ethanol ee Cee neler eee S 449 Event Data 70 Exhaust Gas 92 452
10. 128 129 Forward secer rierades REEL PES 128 129 Reatward uS vega acad Aa UR eae ae aes 128 TIE a sets te Ub eek a dox 129 Manual Park 481 Manual Service 574 Manual Transmission 367 521 523 Fluid Level Check 521 523 Shift Speeds ete Sansa td 370 Map Reading Lights 143 195 Master Cylinder 519 Methanol 449 uuu ace eS ERE Rau 103 Electric 111 Exterior Folding iu der om ders 110 Heated ko Ph dee e E feeb d RP 111 Outside 559 56 Genus v Sa 110 111 Rearview erra Rati ea Ris ERA eA 103 Vanity scs RR bes 112 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System 442 MOPAR Parts 2 5 gua bana ea ee anu 496 573 ws acess can hw EY s 449 Multi Function Control 141 Occupant Restraints cake aka wage ea rei Rond 42 EN Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 448 549 550 Oil Erngi ere edo 255 498 549 550 590 INDEX MM Capacity esa e eee e a Sed 547 548 Change Interval k ameca IR d 498 Checking 225228525544 ht erede aperia 498 Dipstick epe ete sd 498 Di
11. 324 SRT Drive Modes 301 General Overview 324 Race 312 Climate Control Functions 329 Valet Modes iiis p04 49 ditare rei 316 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 331 ECO Mode If Equipped With Automatic Operating TIPS i dS EROR ER S 332 Trarismussiotk ea irem ey 319 E UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION UCONNECT RADIOS IF EQUIPPED 319 QUICK TIPS eek te te ene Ge RR 336 E iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED 319 Introducing Deonnset ve sace x m en 336 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF Get Started Soror ep aee eg 337 0 Basic Voice 338 Ree CSO ics dio eee ERI A E 339 E E i o P oad 339 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES 322 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Phone 252259220992 8 340 Voice Texting 8 4A 8 4AN 349 Voice Text Reply i ecce ee eg 341 Yelp 8 8 4 350 Climate 8 4 8 4 343 SiriusXM Travel Link 8 4A 8 4AN 351 Navigation 84 84 344 Siri Eyes Free If Equipped Uconnect Access 8 4 8 4 345 Do Not Disturb Vehicle Health
12. 546 Certification Label 455 Chains Tite uisa ed ha pM ed 440 Chart Dre SIZIng cue Rx Ee Ee Rn 421 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 495 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 92 Checks ot ey a 92 Child Restraints i seb Rem mn 7 Child Restraints booster SEATS ss cese y onere rp 76 Center Seat LATCH 22242420250 82 Child Restraints 4 tdt gene t RR 7 INDEX 581 Child Seat Installation 87 How Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt 84 Infants And Child Restraints 74 Install A LATCH Compatible Child Restraint 83 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat da ur 85 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children 78 Older Children And Child Restraints 74 Seating Positions 77 Using The Top Tether Anchorage 88 Clean Air Gasoline 449 Cleaning mr d ERR ES 526 Climate Control 324 AUTOMA i 412reuked beo Rex re ES 324 Cold Weather Operation 365 Console Overhead 195 Console 5hifter saa edad we nd 381 SRT Contract 571 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 516 Cooling System ses
13. STARTING PROCEDURES Manual Transmission If Equipped Automatic Transmission If Equipped Keyless Enter N Go Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 299 O If Engine Fails To Start After Starting ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED 359 360 360 361 362 365 365 367 367 MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED 1 4 Skip Shift Downshifting AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Key Ignition Park Interlock O Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 367 356 STARTING AND OPERATING Eight Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipp d eile stad UE 374 B AUTOSTICK 381 Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or Console Mounted Shifter 381 B DRIVE 5 385 Launch Mode If Equipped 389 Guidelines For Track 393 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES 396 Acceleration 2 2 2 396 PACH ON i ste ER 397 DRIVING THROUGH WATER 397 Flowing Rising 398 POWER STEERING 6 4L ENGINE 399 POWER STEERING 6 2L SUPERCHARGED
14. To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners abrasives or polishing compounds They will perma nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH Used on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish CAUTION Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527 Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or equiva lent or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue Do not use any
15. 216 Rear Window Features 216 Recorder Event Data 70 Recreational Towing 458 Reformulated Gasoline 449 Refrigerants sasae fade ke 506 Release 135 592 INDEX Reminder Lights 141 Reminder Seat 44 Remote Control Starting System iios b dcs ni maa ae aa 27 Remote Keyless Entry RKE Arm Alarm 19 FCC General Information 26 Lock The Doors 23 Panic ua 0 6 vot is ORE 24 Programming Additional Key Fobs 18 24 Programming Additional Transmitters 18 24 Remote Keyless Entry 22 Unlatch The Trunk Jac YER 24 Unlock The Doors 22 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 320 Remote Starting Uconnect Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Settings Remote Starting System 27 Remote Trunk 40 Replacement Bulbs aer ege 542 Replacement Keys 9 mes 17 Replacement 496 Replacement 438 Reporting Safety 573 Restraint 131
16. C cx 2016 Qhallenger OWNER S MANUAL SRT Hellcat VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public trans portation Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improve ments to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manu factured Copyright 2015 FCA US LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTIO
17. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 465 WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury TIRE SERVICE KIT IF EQUIPPED Tire Service Kit Small punctures up to 1 4 inch 6 mm in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit Foreign objects e g Torque Patterns screws or nails should not be removed from the tire Tire After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut bolt torque to be Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to sure that all the lug nuts bolts are properly seated approximately 4 F 20 C agunt the hes This kit will provide a temporary tire seal allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles 160 km with a maximum speed of 55 mph 90 km h 466 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Tire Service Kit Storage The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk ae 10604037982 Tire Service Kit Location Tire Service Kit Components And Operation SCORE Tire Service Kit Components 1 Sealant Bottle 2 Deflation Button 3 Pressure Gauge 4 Power Button 5 Mode Select Knob 6 Sealant Hose Clear 7 Air Pump Hose Black 8 Power Plug located on the bottom side of the Tire Service Kit Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the a
18. DEFAULT MODE This mode will be activated automatically when restarting the vehicle unless Valet mode or ECO mode if equipped is active This mode is for typical driving conditions where the ABS and Transmission will be operating in their STREET set tings which cannot be changed while in this mode The Steering electric power steering if equipped assist and Suspension active dampening system stiff ness may be configured to either the STREET SPORT or TRACK settings within this mode Steering wheel mounted paddle shifters may be enabled or disabled while in this mode as well VALET MODE To enter this mode the operator must select it from the Drive Modes interface and enter a four digit PIN code The PIN code is not predeter mined so the operator is free to select any four digit numeric combination that will be easy to remember While in Valet Mode the following vehicle configura tions are set and locked to prevent unauthorized modification Engine limited to a lowest power output state Transmission locks out access to first gear and shifts earlier than normal ee STARTING AND OPERATING 389 e Traction Steering and Suspension are forced to STREET settings e Steering wheel mounted paddle shifters are disabled e The SRT Drive Modes are not available Pushing the SRT button will display the unlock keypad e The ESC Off button is disabled e The Launch Control button is disabled NOTE To exit V
19. SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FR D CARGO SHOULD 195 70814 125 70015 200kPa 29PSI 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4N109268 ORIGINAL Siz INFLATION PRESSURE Example Tire Placard Location B Pillar 811b5a9a Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 Total weight your vehicle can carry 3 Tire size designed for your vehicle 428 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 4 Cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard in Vehicle Loading in the Starting And Operating section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWKRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in the Starting And Operating sec tion of this manual To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and carg
20. e Pushing the SRT button on the instrument panel switch bank e Selecting Drive Modes from the Apps menu e Selecting Drive Modes from within the Performance Pages menu NOTE Not all options listed in this manual are available on every vehicle Refer to the chart below for all available Drive Mode vehicle configurations UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 Black Engine Red Key Transmis Paddle Suspen Transmission 700 HP a sion Shifters sion Steering Macuo 6 2L Auto X X X X X N A X 6 2L Manual X X N A N A X N A X 6 4L Auto N A N A X X X X X 6 4L Manual N A N A N A N A X X X The SRT Drive Modes main screen displays the current drive mode and real time status of the vehicle s perfor mance configuration The selectable Drive Modes buttons are Track Sport Custom or Default and will be high lighted when displaying the current configuration Infor mation shown below each drive mode button will indi cate the actual status of each system along with a graphic that displays the status of the vehicle s components The color red indicates Track orange Sport and yellow Street If the system status shown does not match the current drive mode set up a message will be displayed indicating which values are not matching the current mode and why NOTE ESC Full Off can be activated across all of the Drive Mode features by pushing and
21. e The tire has not been driven on when flat The damage is only on the tread section of your tire sidewall damage is not repairable The puncture is no greater than a of an inch 6 mm ee STARTING AND OPERATING 435 Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information Damaged Run Flat tires or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description Load Index and Speed Symbol All Season Tires If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons Spring Summer Fall and Winter Traction levels may vary between different all season tires All season tires can be identified by the M S M amp S M S or MS designation on the tire sidewall Use all season tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40 F 5 C or if roads are covered with ice or snow For more informa tion contact an authorized dealer Summer tires do not contain the all season designation
22. 359 Starting 359 Steering Column Controls 141 Column Lock uz e bua eid wee anaes 150 Tilt Colum 4 uses cs ma bu RR 150 151 Wheel Heated 152 Wheel 150 151 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 320 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 320 DLOFaBE eia dois ce D PM e Re ee cR dis 542 Storage Vehicle i sss eme 333 542 storing Your Vehicle 542 Stuck Freeing RR aee ie ea d 480 Sunglasses Storage SUNROOF duce REP ed Smee oo ueni dnd 204 Supplemental Restraint System Air Bag Synthetic Engine Oil esee 500 System Remote Starting 27 Telescoping Steering Column 150 151 Temperature Control Automatic 331 Tilt Down Ups Se Tilt Steering Time Delay Timers SRT Tire And Loading Information Placard Tire Markings s coax ue rie x Eden hd 506 INDEX Aging Life Of 438 Air Pressure eese aS ead 431 Chas 523322213999 BERG 440 General Information 431 High Speed sese ade oti Be Red 433 Inflation 432 Life Of Tites 438 Load
23. Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 1 Fuse Spare 2 40 Amp Green Radiator Fan 1 Non 6 2L Supercharged 3 50 Amp Red Electric Power Steering 1 If Equipped Ra diator Fan 6 2L Supercharged If Equipped 4 30 Amp Pink Starter 5 40 Amp Green Electronic Stability Control 6 30 Amp Pink Electronic Stability Control 7 20 Amp Blue Police Ignition Run ACC 1 8 20 Amp Blue Police Ignition Run ACC 2 9 20 Amp Yellow All Wheel Drive Module If Equipped 10 10 Amp Red Security If Equipped Under hood Lamp Police 11 20 Amp Yellow Horns 12 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch 13 Fuse Spare MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 14 Fuse Spare 15 20 Amp Yellow Left HID If Equipped 16 20 Amp Yellow Right HID If Equipped 18 50 Amp Red Radiator Fan 2 Non 6 2L Supercharged 19 50 Amp Red Electric Power Steering 2 If Equipped Ra diator Fan 6 2L Supercharged 20 30 Amp Pink Wiper Motor 21 30 Amp Pink Headlamp Washers If Equipped 20 Amp Blue Police Police Bat Feed 2 22 40 Amp Green 20 Engine Cooling Pump 6 2L Supercharged Amp Blue Police Police Bat Feed 3 23 20 Amp Blue Police Bat Feed 1 24 20 Amp Blue Police Ignition Run ACC Feed 3 28 Fuse Spare 534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M C
24. G Force Shows the actual intake air temperature Engine 2 67 Radio Media Controls Phone SRT Performance Pages Gauges 2 6 2L 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss G Force 10 10 Performance Pages Home Timers Gouge 1 Gouges G Force Engine SRT Performance Pages G Force When selected this screen displays all four G Force values two lateral and two longitudinal as well as steering angle When G Force is selected the following features will be available e Lateral G Force Left and Right The lateral g force measures the sideways left and right force of the vehicle Longitudinal G Force Fore and Aft The longitudinal g force measures the acceleration and braking force of the vehicle Peak G Forces Fore Aft Left and Right This shows the maximum g forces that have been achieved since the last reset from the DID Peak values are maintained through ignition cycles by the DID until they are cleared by the driver e Vehicle Speed Vehicle Speed measures the current speed of the vehicle in either mph or km h starting at 0 with no maximum value e Steering Wheel Angle Steering Wheel Angle utilizes the steering angle sensor to measure the degree of the steering wheel relative to zero The zero degree measurement indicates a steering wheel straight ahead position When the steering angle value is negative this indicates a turn to the left and when the steering
25. If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due to a collision see your authorized dealer for service e Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor including transparent material or aftermarket grilles Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present the system will return to the Adaptive Cruise Control Off state and will resume function by simply reactivating it NOTE e If the ACC FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor message occurs frequently e g more than once on every trip without any snow rain mud or other obstruction have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized dealer Installing a snow plow front end protector an after market grille or modifying the grille is not recom mended Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC FCW operation Service ACC FCW Warning If the system turns off and the DID displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Required or Cruise FCW Unavail able Service Required there may be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC func tionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions ACC will be temporarily unavailable ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 If this occurs try activating ACC again later following an ignition cycle If the problem persists see your autho rized dealer Precautions While
26. Maintaining Your Vehicle for filter replacement instruc tions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335 Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS Hot weather and vehicle interior is very moce contro to 2 AIC and blower on high Roll down the windows for a minute to flush out the hot air Once comfort is achieved adjust controls for comfort Turn A C and set the mode control to the position Cool Sunny Operate in o position Cool amp Humid conditions e 06 64 Set the mode control to xf and tum A C to keep 66656 45 n c windows clear Set the mode control to the 2 position If windshield Cold Weather fogging starts to occur move the control towards the 5 position 0456052237 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS Introducing Uconnect 10 56 Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these help 1053 107 9 ful quick tips It provides the key Voice Commands Classic Rock ti d to k t trol t ips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5 0 or 94 7 8 4A 8 4AN system WCSX FM Key Features 94 7 WCSX D Detroits 772 e 5 touchscreen browse P Three buttons on either side of the display J Ta 28 ONE al za 4 Media Phone Manager E Settings Climate Radio 0307077985 Uconnect 8 4AN If you see
27. Wheels OFF The Towing Condition Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission round Flat Tow None NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Rear NOT RECOMMENDED NOT RECOMMENDED On Trailer All OK OK STARTING AND OPERATING 459 Automatic Transmission If Equipped Recreational towing with rear wheels on the ground is NOT ALLOWED The only acceptable method for tow ing this vehicle behind another vehicle is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground Use of a towing dolly with rear wheels on the ground is NOT ALLOWED as severe transmission damage will occur Use of a towing dolly with front wheels on the ground is not recommended as vehicle damage may occur CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission damage Dam age from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Manual Transmission If Equipped Recreational towing with rear wheels on the ground is NOT ALLOWED The only acceptable method for tow ing this vehicle behind another vehicle is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground Use of a towing dolly with rear wheels on the ground is NOT ALLOWED as severe transmission damage will occur Use of a towing dolly with front wheels on the ground is not recommended as vehicle damage may occur CAUTION Towing this vehicle
28. 24 10 Amp Red Integrated Center Stack 25 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor 26 15 Amp Blue Cygnus Transmission Module LD LX LD LX 27 25 Amp Clear Amplifier If Equipped 31 25 Amp Breaker Power Seats If Equipped 32 15 Amp Blue HVAC Module Cluster ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539 38 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 33 15 Amp Blue Ignition Switch RF Hub Module Steering Col umn Lock LX If Equipped 34 10 Amp Red Steering Column Module Clock LX 35 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor 36 15 Amp Blue Electronic Exhaust Valve If Equipped 37 20 Amp Yellow Radio 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest Console Media Hub 40 Fuse Spare 41 E Fuse Spare 42 30 Amp Pink Rear Defrost 43 20 Amp Yellow Comfort Seat And Steering Wheel Module Heated Steering Wheel RR Heated Seats 44 10 Amp Red Park Assist Blind Spot Rear View Camera 45 15 Amp Blue Cluster Rearview Mirror Compass LD LX Humidity Sensor 540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 46 Fuse Spare 47 10 Amp Red Adaptive Front Lighting Auto High BEAM Day Time Running Lamps If Equipped 48 20 Amp Yellow Active Suspension SRT 49 Fuse Spare 50 Fuse Spare 51 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats If Equipped 52 10 Amp Red
29. Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently For states that require an Inspection and Mainte serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine NOTE If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 2 As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready
30. Qo Apps Nav lt a n Media Phone 0455080408 Radio Controls Valet Mode Activation To enter Valet Mode press the Valet button on the touchscreen and a popup screen will ask you if you would like to enter Valet Mode after selecting Yes you will be asked to enter a 4 digit PIN code The PIN code is ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 not set so you are free to select any 4 digit numeric combination that will be easy to remember While in Valet Mode the following vehicle configurations are set and locked to prevent unauthorized modification e e Engine limited to the lowest power output state Transmission locks out access to first gear and up shifts earlier than normal Traction Steering and Suspension are set to their STREET settings Steering wheel paddle shifters are disabled The Drive Mode interface is not available Pressing the SRT button on the touchscreen will display the unlock keypad The ESC Off button is disabled The Launch Control button is disabled Valet Mode Active gPress Here to Exit MAX A C RES D m UE 1 NT Media SRT Page Apps Drv Mode Phone Valet Mode Deactivation To exit Valet Mode you must enter the same 4 digit PIN that was used to enter the mode The unlock keypad can be accessed by either pushing the SRT button on the faceplate or pressing the Valet Mode Active Press Here to Exit button on the touchscreen 318 U
31. Sport button on the touchscreen to turn off some comfort trade att traction control and reduce stability control STREET Balance of suspension firmness and ride comfort e Street Press the Street button on the touchscreen to provide 1 415 Radio Media Settings full traction control full stability control 9 Suspension e Track Press the Track button on the touchscreen to provide the firmest possible suspension stiffness with the highest amount of comfort trade off ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 Sport Press the Sport button on the touchscreen to provide a firmer suspension stiffness with moderate comfort trade off e Street Press the Street button on the touchscreen to provide a balance of suspension stiffness and ride comfort for typical daily driving Steering If Equipped With 6 4L Engine v FM 101 1 9 45 Steering Highest steering Track feel highest steering effort SPORT Higher steering Sport feel higher steering effort Se STREET Balance of steering feel and comfort p Street e a si 199 v gt z a gt Media SRT Page Apps Drv Mode Nav Phone 0440081159 Radio Steering e Track Press the Track button on the touchscreen to adjust the steering effort to the highest level 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Sport Press the Sp
32. Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed push the SET or SET button and release Release the accelerator and the ve hicle will operate at the selected speed Once a speed has been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH km h will appear indicating what speed was set A CRUISE indicator lamp along with set speed will also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the speed is set UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with out erasing the set speed from memory Pushing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed from memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the SET button The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under standing Your Instrument Panel for more information The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U S mph or Metric km h U S Speed mph e Pushing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set
33. ecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 732 8243 e Canadian residents should refer to Transport Cana da s website for additional information w
34. sion to the lowest gear possible at the current speed Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged e The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is detected To disengage AutoStick mode return the shift lever to the DRIVE position or press and hold the shift paddle if the shift lever is already in DRIVE until D is once again indicated in the instrument cluster You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury STARTING AND OPERATING 385 DRIVE MODES 10 10 54 Your SRT vehicle is equipped with a SRT Drive Mode Pa Spat stan peret feature This feature gives the driver control over the Power systems the vehicle which affect its performance enabling the driver to tune it for desired driving sce narios Below are the modes of operation Traction Suspension NOTE Refer to Drive Modes in Understanding Your n Track Set Up 5 Valet Eco amp Instrument Panel for further descriptions of these modes C J fe GR CEN Radio Media Controls Apps Climate Nav Phone 0415080797 Drive Modes TRACK MODE This mode is a predefined configu ration optimized f
35. tection Zones e The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer Therefore visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change If the trailer or other object i e bicycle sports equipment extends beyond the side of your vehicle this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow ice and dirt road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects bum per stickers bicycle racks etc The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible chime alert and reducing the radio volume Refer to Modes Of Operation for further information The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points side rear front while driving to see if an alert is necessary The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries Entering From The Side UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Entering From The Rear Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side and
36. 3 Speedometer peer 2 20 The gauge pointer will likely indicate higher tem perature when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range e Indicates vehicle speed ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER SRT ND il Tr 0403080074 Instrument Cluster For SRT 6 2L Supercharged ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 1 Tachometer 4 Fuel Gauge Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank RPM x 1000 when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in th
37. Exhaust System soci ER aer 92 510 Exterior Folding Mirrors 110 Exterior Lighting llle 137 Exterior Lights rna Gale LR 96 Filler Location 453 Filters Air Cleaner 423a awit doe 502 Air Conditioning 334 506 Engine Oll ic ceca devs te RE sed 502 549 550 Engine Oil Disposal 501 Flashers Hazard Warning eee Ped 462 Signal n gargs 96 142 250 Hlash I P ss Ry 142 Flooded Engine Starting 365 Fluid Brake 45 129 iese bee 549 55 Eluid Capacities sec Rene RR 547 548 Fluid Leaks 22 9 ERR CPP TERRE Ego s 96 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 522 Rr eyed ds 519 Cooling System 2525552 ue eee p 513 Engine Oil uu e onm e 498 Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 549 Folding Rear 133 Forward Collision Warning 181 Freeing Stuck 480 AREE wae ease ee 448 Adding src cerite re a e a 453 451 Clean ise race ace P ead 449 Ethanol sercat Bach dein Grice alee RES 449
38. Oe eese 135 Lead Free Gasoline get dcr ER Rd 448 Leaks BOR deed hae ed 96 OF TMCS 54 tad Leite Steed Lee ps d 438 Light Bulbs ee peg ete 96 542 Lig hilsner ienaa ten aoe lees ade 96 137 Ait BAG eta tee ETE 67 94 228 Automatic Headlights 138 Brake Assist Warning 416 Brake Warning 229 405 Bulb 544 Center Mounted Stop 546 Courtesy Reading 143 195 CTS uote ect aot erase ee eee 251 252 Daytime Running 140 Dimmer Switch Headlight 141 142 Engine Temperature Warning 232 Exterior e dk TES Gao TE a 96 Hazard Warning Flasher 462 Headlighisz ss ee hene se ERES 137 545 Headlights On 141 Headlights On With Wipers 138 148 Headlight Switch 137 High Beam iie ERI Rm ERE ds 142 High Beam Low Beam Select 142 Illuminated 21 Instrument Cluster 137 Intensity Controls senas iee eee 144 Int tl r Ree er 143 195 License sepeda menun eG ee ps 546 Lights On Reminder 141 Low 247 Malfunction Indicator Check En
39. Race Options Valet wy Nav 0415080790 Red Key FOB If your vehicle is equipped with the 6 2L supercharged engine it will support an additional engine power level configuration as part of SRT Drive Modes Use of the RED key FOB unlocks the full potential of the engine s output and allows the driver to select from two power levels within Drive Modes Set Up 10 10 Sport Custom Default 50074 The black key is currently in use disabling access to Sport the maximum eng 922 power level To enable to the maximum Sport engine power level Sport 1 please use the red key Sport Set Up 0415080789 Black Key FOB Use of the BLACK key FOB limits the driver to a reduced engine output This information is also available within 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL the SRT Drive Modes interface and can be accessed by pressing the KEY FOB button on the touchscreen in the SRT Drive Modes menu Drive Modes 10 10 54 out Sport Custom Default Power Transmission Paddle Shifters Traction Suspension Track Set Up C m Phone 0415080797 Media Controls Radio Drive Modes Your SRT vehicle is equipped with a Drive Modes feature which allows for coordinating the operation of various vehicle systems depending upon the type of driving behavior desired The Drive Modes feature is controlled through the Uconnect radio and may be accessed by performing any of the following
40. To enable this feature on your Apple iPhone follow these 4 simple steps waro go lt Uconnect Settings Bluetooth Airplane Mode Bruetooth T wr aL HM1300 JBL Fip Sync Contacts D ooz Control Conter Uconnect Phone Favorites Do Not Disturb Phone Recents S Sonera Brightness All Contacts 0415076965 iPhone Notification Setting 1 Select Settings 2 Select Bluetooth 3 Select the i for the paired vehicle 4 Turn on Show Notifications UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343 TIP Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free you can use your voice to send a text message Climate 8 4A 8 4AN Too hot Too cold Adjust vehicle temperatures hands free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead If vehicle is equipped with climate control Push the VR button 9 After the beep say one of the following commands e Set driver temperature to 70 degrees e Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees TIP Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped 344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SSS Navigation 8 4A 8 4AN MAX The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and become more pr
41. WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Continued 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Power Seats The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the front seat cushions The power seat switches are used to control the position of the seat Power Seat Switch Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward The seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar sup port Pushing upward or downward on the switch will raise and lower the position of the support The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch The seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached Tilting T
42. driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors or other system components The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment A low energy output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR WARNING e No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed
43. normal operation of low beams 2 Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the system Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area To activate the delay feature turn OFF the ignition switch while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off NOTE The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature If you turn the headlights park lights or ignition switch ON again the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The Headlight Time Delay is programmable us ing the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped The Daytime Running Lights will turn On when the engine is started and remain On unless the headlamps are turned ON the parking brake is applied or the engine is shut Off ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 NOTE If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel f
44. or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 220 Engine Oil Life Reset INSTRUMENT CLUSTER SRT 221 Performance Shift Indicator PSI If INSTRUMENT CLUSTER SRT 224 Ea d VERD EREGRUN M E WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS 226 Cruise 1 258 Red Telltale Indicator Lights 227 258 Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights 239 ae Green Telltale Indicator Lights 249 Blue Telltale Indicator yep On The US tb 0 White Telltale Indicator Light 252 Suse ee Features Uconnect 8 4 Settings 270 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY DID 253 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Guidelines For Race Track Use Of Your SRT 286 Regulatory And Safety Information 322 SRT Performance 289 CLIMATE 5
45. or the transmission gear selector Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must start the engine and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result Continued PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi tion When shifting into PARK push the lock button on the shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position P With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK STARTING AND OPERATING 379 REVERSE R This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL N Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
46. through the inside of the vehicle Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat stroke 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR Trunk Emergency Release As a security measure a Trunk Internal Emergency Re lease lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk the trunk can be opened by actuating the glow in the dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism wv e 9710062170 Trunk Emergency Internal Release OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems Seat Belt Systems e Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Air Bags e Child Restraints Important Safety Precautions Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat If a child from 2 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child restraint must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as
47. traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action On the highways slow down Incity traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 463 e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum WARNING heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a You or others can be badly burned by hot engine supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If from the engine cooling system y
48. vehicle However you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previ ously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected the exterior lights will flash and the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times and the exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Check the vehicle for tampering Security System Manual Override The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger ILLUMINATED ENTRY The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or th
49. you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497 DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be ba
50. 124 128 Rearward 124 128 posse ent gba ede ed beue ases 125 9 bx ge a pg dene 55 56 Advance Front Air Bag 56 57 Air Bag Operation 58 Air Bag Warning 67 Enhanced Accident 66 Event Data Recorder EDR 70 Front Air ese an een es 55 56 If A Deployment Occurs Knee Impact Bolsters 59 Maintaining Your Air Bag System 69 Redundant Air Bag Warning Light 69 Side Air Bags RR d 60 Transporting Pets eei r9 90 Air Bag 55 Air Bag Light ise pis 67 94 228 Air Bag Maintenance 69 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 502 Air Conditioner 505 Air Conditioning 334 506 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 332 335 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 505 506 Air Conditioning 331 505 Air Pressure 432 Alarm Arm The Systemi 19 Disarm The Syst m ese sw beet e hb e es 20 Alarm Pani 04 4 ay ae RE RU Rs 24 INDEX 579 Alarm Security Alarm 19 231 Alarm Sys
51. 450 W TRAILER TOWING 457 Materials Added To Fuel CMT 451 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND Fuel System 451 MOTORHOME 4 sx den 458 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 458 STARTING AND OPERATING 359 STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING Continued Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the trans mission gear selector Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle If equipped with Keyless Enter N Go al
52. Alert 346 General Information 353 Register 84 84 346 Additional Information 354 Mobile App 84 84 347 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 Air Outlets 5 Keyless Start Stop Button 6 Trunk Release Button 2 Instrument Cluster 7 Headlight Switch 3 Glove Box 4 Media Center INSTRUMENT CLUSTER SRT UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 80 In E S p WT 2 2 TW 0 Lm y Instrument Cluster For SRT 6 4L 0403080073 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 Tachometer 4 Fuel Gauge Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank RPM x 1000 when the Keyless Push Button lgnition is in the ON RUN position The fuel pump symbol points to 2 Driver Information Display DID Display the valrdexwitere the fuel dooris located When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Driver Information Display DID mes 5 Temperature Gauge sages Refer to Driver Information Display DID The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for fur perature Any reading within the normal range indi ther information cates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily
53. Continued CAUTION Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire sed failure and loss of vehicle control TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS CAUTION The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at Replacing original tires with tires of a different size different loads and perform different steering driving may result in false speedometer and odometer and braking functions For these reasons they wear at readings unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with Due to limited clearance tire chains or traction devices aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type are not recommended tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Remember more frequent rota tion is permissible if desired Also correct for anything causing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire rotation Tire Rotation Same Tire Size On Front And Rear Axle The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped with all season tires is the forward cross as shown in the following diagram STARTING AND OPERATING 441
54. Driving With ACC In certain driving situations ACC may have detection issues In these cases ACC may brake late or unexpect edly The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene Towing A Trailer Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel or a vehicle merging in from a side lane There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly SSS 11 J 032400170 Offset Driving Condition Example Turns And Bends When driving on a curve with ACC engaged the system may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons with no target vehicle detected Once 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume Using ACC On Hills your original Set Speed This is a part of normal ACC system functionality When driving on hills ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane Depending on the speed vehicle load traffic NOTE On tight turns ACC performance may be limited conditions and the steepness of the hills ACC perfor mance may be limited 032400171 032400172 Turn Or Bend Example ACC Hill Example es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 Lane Changing ACC m
55. EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 Vehicle Security Warning Light If Equipped Red Telltale Light What It Means Vehicle Security Warning Light This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Sx Engine Temperature Warning Light Red Warning Light What It Means Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condition As engine coolant temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Fur
56. INDEX 585 Filler Cap Gas Cap ix em aus isan ies 453 dede xU RR ment aod Rea dne id 448 Light svi ede eec dudes 247 Materials Added 451 Methanol Soe eae 449 Octane Rating sess ess eat oes 448 549 550 Requirements icis gane dee repe a 448 Specifications gins cea be gd 549 550 Tank Capacity esee ee ent a 547 548 Fueling iiid aee reed Ga ab ee Ras 453 Fusese 3 2 04 ree eng oe a a PRISES REG 530 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 196 202 Gas Cap Fuel Filler 453 494 Gasoline Clean 449 Gasoline 448 Gasoline 449 Gear Ranges ies dee x e em ee 376 G FOME sy eBay eee ayes Ba Gare ays 263 ORT leds ieee eh eee es 263 Glass Cleaning ets eee UR ads 529 Gross Axle Weight Rating 456 Gross Vehicle Weight 456 GVWR EUS EP OO eee SE 456 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising Or Shallow Standing 397 Hazard Warning Flasher 462 eme 2062094 Rhe donee 545 Automatic 138 Cleaning uus spe E xe deka DHS Rer 528 Delay sies 140 High Bea
57. If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Fuel Economy Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the DID Two sub menu pages one with Current value dis played and one without the Current Value displayed Current Fuel Economy MPG L 100 km or km 1 Range To Empty miles or km Average Fuel Economy L 100 km or km 1 The Max and Min values will correspond to the particular engine requirements Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber color and turn green as Fuel Economy improves Hold OK to reset average fuel economy information Trip Info Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the DID Toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip B The Trip information will display the following Distance Average Fuel Economy Elapsed Time Hold the OK button to reset feature information Audio Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Audio Menu displays in the DID Stored Messages Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Messages Menu item is highlighted in the DID This es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 feature shows the number of stored warning messages Trip A Distance Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see e Trip B Distance what the stored messages are None S
58. If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty 0346041649 Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 12 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Integrated Center Stack WARNING 2 38 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Continued ees UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 WARNING Continued Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the Continued CAUTION Continued battery even more quickly Only use these intermit tently and with gre
59. It could come loose in a serious personal injury collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s Continued 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the seat belt in a rear seat Use this simple 5 step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle s seat belt alone 1 Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat 2 Do the child s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back 3 Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder between their neck and arm 4 Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible touching the child s thighs and not their stomach 5 Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip If the answer to any of these questions was no then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle If the child is using the lap shoulder belt check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle or use a booster sea
60. NEUTRAL Refer to Manual Park Release in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL when the engine is off e The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles 48 km The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 30 miles 48 km then the only acceptable method of towing is with a flatbed truck E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 487 CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission damage Dam age from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle s battery is discharged refer to Manual Park Release in this section for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing Manual Transmission The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed If flatbed equipment is not available and the transmis sion is operable the vehicle may be flat towed with all four wheels on the ground under the following condi tions e The transmission must be in NEUTRAL The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles 48 km The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h If the transmission is not operable then the only accept l6 able method of towing is with a flatbed truck CAUTION Towin
61. On Exit When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press the Auto Unlock On Exit button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected e Flash Lights With Lock When this feature is selected the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or when using the passive entry feature This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press the Flash Lights with Lock button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting has been selected e Sound Horn With Lock When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the door locks are activated To make your selection press either the Off 1st Press or 2nd Press button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 e Sound Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection press the Sound Horn with Remote Start button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting showing that
62. PARK Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the engine can be turned off This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock system BTSI that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied To shift the transmission out of PARK the engine must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds Eight Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped The transmission gear range PRNDM is displayed both on the shift lever and in the Driver Information Display DID To select a gear range press the lock button on the shift lever and move the lever rearward or forward You must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or RE VERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock Sys tem in this section Select the DRIVE range for normal driving Automatic Transmission Shifter The electronically controlled
63. Restraints 71 Restraints 42 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 480 Rotation Tires oc cdg deed eee be es de eR n 440 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 94 Safety Checks Outside 96 Safety Defects 573 Safety Exhaust 92 Safety Information 419 Safety stesse ees tee t Che 92 Schedule Maintenance 554 Seat Belt Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 53 Energy Management Feature 53 Lap Shoulder Belt Operation 48 Lap Shoulder 46 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting 50 Pregnant Women lt e css e e eee 52 Seat Belt Extender 51 Seat Belt Pretensioner 52 Seat Belt 44 Seat Belt System 42 Seat Belt 529 Seat Belt 44 Seat 6 44 94 Child 71 EXt nd 2rd Ra Sole aed CES 51 Front Seat 12 aces ea eas Me en ee 44 46 48 Inspection eh hes 94 Operating Instructions 48 IN
64. Shift Light 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Gear Gear Gear Gear Gear Launch NR Control Reset to factory default 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 Shift Light Off Shift Light RPM Set Up J Tm D 9 CY Media Controis Apps Climate Phone 0455080407 Shift Light RPM Set Up The Shift Light RPM Set Up allows you to set the shift light to actuate for gears 1 2 3 4 and 5 8 automatic transmission 1 2 3 4 and 5 6 manual transmission Shift Light To actuate the Shift Light feature press the Shift Light button on the touchscreen then press the Shift Light On button on the touchscreen Activation is shown on 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Pressing and releasing the up down arrow buttons on the touchscreen above and below each listed gear the RPM values will change in increments of 250 RPM Pressing and holding the arrows will change the RPM values in increments of 500 RPM ranging from 2000 6000 RPM The Shift Light setup screen may only be accessed if the feature is enabled press the Reset to factory default button on the touchscreen to change back to factory settings or press the Shift Light Off button on the touchscreen to turn the system off com pletely Valet Mode t FM 97 1 HD1 Valet Mode will limit the performance of your vehicle and requires a custom pin code for activation and deactivation Enter Valet Mode
65. Show Command List settings press the Always With Help or Never button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Clock After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Sync Time With GPS If Equipped This feature will allow you to automatically have the radio set the time To change the Sync Time setting press the Sync time with GPS button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected e Set Time Hours This feature will allow you to adjust the hours The Sync time with GPS button on the touchscreen must be un checked To make your selection press the or buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or down es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 e Set Time Minutes This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes The Sync time with GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked To make your selection press the or buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or down uon e Time Format This feature will allow you to select the time format display setting Press the Time Format button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting showing that setting has been selected e Show Time In Status Bar If Equipped This feature will allow you
66. The following conditions cancel the system e e e The brake pedal is applied The CANCEL button is pressed The vehicle speed goes below 15 mph 24 km h An Anti Lock Brake System ABS event occurs The shift lever gear selector is removed from the Drive position The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates The vehicle parking brake is applied A Trailer Sway Control TSC event occurs The driver switches ESC to full off mode To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in m memory if The Normal Fixed Speed Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button is pushed The ignition is turned off The Adaptive Cruise Control ACC On Off button is pushed To Resume If there is a set speed in memory press the RES resume button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The DID will display the last set speed 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen WARNING NING speed unit of U S mph or Metric km h The Resume function should only be used if traffic U S Speed mph and road conditions permit Resuming a set speed Bet ny that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the or decelerate too sharply for
67. VEHICLE 191 ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense or render the system temporarily unavailable When you turn ParkSense off in DRIVE the instru ment cluster will display PARKSENSE OFF for five seconds Furthermore once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the Driver Infor mation Display DID will display PARKSENSE OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding an audio tone Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper Ensure the ParkSense system is OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc are placed within 12 inches 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as
68. amp 000912 000 021 amp 000904 000 000 061 00080 00008 ooo zor S 00001 00096 9 00009 00006 S 000081 x 000 2 0000 x oo0 sz 9 000051 ooo zz lt 00002 00099 000 01L 00009 000001 x x 000 00006 0009 2 00008 x 000 amp 00007 00096 00009 x 00006 S 00006 oo0 vz amp 000 0r x 00081 00006 oo0fzL 00002 x 0009 000 01 o Su o 7 o D 68 og 2822 amp 888c 3 5aoi5mu ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 565 00001 8 ooo osz x 000 3 0000 000861 8 000062 ooo zer 00022 000921 amp 000912 000021 amp 00002 00 4 00061 00090 8 00098 00020 S 00091 00096 000991 00006 9 000081 000 S 00001 00097 00001 00027 lt 000921 00099 00004 00009 000001 000 00006 0009 9 00008 0002 00097 00096 00009 00006 S 00006 000 amp 0000 00081 00006 00021 00002 0009 000 01 wl an let a B 25 2 8 r2aco unl t8 EBRWER 566 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se The spark plug change interval is mileage based only yearly intervals do not apply WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you hav
69. and provide a variety of options to add to delete send or hear the message again After the beep tell Uconnect what you d like to do For instance if you re happy with your message after the beep say Send You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a compatible MAP enabled smartphone to use your voice to send a personalized text message For details about MAD visit UconnectPhone com Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only To enable this feature on your Apple iPhone follow these 4 simple steps 350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL emaro Teo Uconnect Settings Bluetooth M Airplane Mode Bruetooth T wr 2 umm Celular HM1300 JBL Flip Sync Contacts D ooz Control Conter Uconnect Phone Favorites Do Not Disturb Phone Recents S Sonera Brightness All Contacts 0415076965 iPhone Notification Setting 1 Select Settings 2 Select Bluetooth 3 Select the i for the paired vehicle 4 Turn on Show Notifications TIP Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free you can use your voice to send a text message Messages are limited to 140 characters The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be illuminated to use the feature Yelp 8 4A 8 4AN Once registered with Uconnect Access you can us
70. angle value is positive a turn to the right UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 10 10 Performance Pages 380 fa 5 lt Pressure fw mu Nav Phone 0415080787 When a force greater than zero is measured the display SRT Performance Pages Engine 6 4L Automatic will update the value as it climbs As the G Force falls Transmission the peak forces will continue to display 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 10 10 Performance Pages Py 2 h 2 e 12 gt EU 27777 S S Home Timers Gauges 1 Gouges 2 Phone SRT Performance Pages Engine 6 2L Automatic Transmission When selected this screen displays the following values Vehicle Speed Shows the actual vehicle speed Instantaneous HorsepowerlKilowatts Shows the instantaneous horsepower Instantaneous Torque Shows the instantaneous torque Oil Pressure 6 4L Only Shows the actual oil pressure e Gear Automatic Transmission Only Shows the current or pending operating gear of the vehicle Boost Pressure 6 2L Only Shows the actual boost pressure es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 SRT Drive Modes Key FOB 6 2L Supercharged Engine If Equipped 10 10 Sport Custom Oefault 50074 The red key is currently in u enabling Sport the On power level To dis ac to the maximum Sport engine power level Sportl please use the black key
71. bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the air bags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme diately Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well NOTE Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys tem perform the following functions Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until th
72. button once to turn the feature On e Push the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn the feature Off 0304049205 Automatic Dimming Mirror If equipped the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a 9 1 1 button 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING ASSIST Call The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the any one of the following support centers road Some Uconnect Access services including 9 1 1 and Assist will NOT work without an operable 1 Roadside Assistance If you get a flat tire or need voice data or 3G data network connection tow just push the ASSIST button and you ll be con nected to someone who can help Roadside Assistance NOTE will know what vehicle you re driving and its location e Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized ae by the subscriber Uconnect Access Customer Care In vehicle support The 9 1 1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile you are connected to an operable 1X voice data or features 3G data network Other Uconnect services will only Vehicle Customer Care Total support for all other be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active vehicle issues and you are connected to an operable 1X voice data or 3G data network ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEH
73. can result in civil penalties being assessed against Continued STARTING AND OPERATING 453 WARNING Continued Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main tenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the bate left side of the vehicle Use a finger to pull open the door Fuel Fill Cap If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement NOTE When removing the fuel filler cap lay the cap cap is for use with this vehicle tether in the hook located on the fuel filler door 454 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impurities into the fuel system A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full WARNING Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled Continued WARNING Continued Never add fuel to the vehicle when
74. cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 7 Passenger Temperature Control Up Button Uconnect 8 4 Only Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button on the faceplate for warmer es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 temperature settings or on the touchscreen press and slide the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for warmer temperature settings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 8 Passenger Temperature Control Down Button Uconnect 8 4 Radio Only Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen press and slide the temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler temperature settings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 9 SYNC Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature On Off The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem perature setting Changing t
75. color and the Inflate Tire to message 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the DID will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the 448 STARTING AND OPERATING low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired opera tion NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment FUEL REQUIREMENTS 6 2L Supercharged And 6 4L Engine These engine are designed to meet all emissions regulations provide optimal 01 fuel economy performance when us ing high quality unleaded Premium sno
76. door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions Replace the battery in the original hand held transmitter Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at HomeLink com for information or assistance WARNING e Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal trans ceiver Do not program the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path o
77. far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly Refer to Child Restraints should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older chil dren who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly oo THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ss WARNING e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front o
78. fish the tether strap up through the opening in the console base WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 483 4 Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the 5 While holding the locking tab in the disengaged lever and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing it to the right 0313041252 Locking Tab position pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and rearward until it locks in place in the vertical position The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be moved Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle 0313041251 Tether Strap 484 WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES EE To Reset The Manual Park Release 3 Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the 1 Push the latch at the base of the lever on the rear side lever is locked Mite stowed position rearward away from the lever to unlatch the lever 4 Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console 2 Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and Reinstall the console storage bin down to its original position until the locking tab snaps into place to secure the lever en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 485 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION MANUAL TRANSMISSION Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable Transmission in N
79. force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition replace the seat belt Air Bag Warning Light e The light should come on and remain on for ry four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is fi
80. fully closed position after closing the door This action allows the door to open without resistance and prevents window and seal damage WARNING Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and do not let children play with power windows Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode Occupants particularly unattended children can become en trapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death AUTO Down Feature If Equipped The driver s door power window switch and passenger door power window switch have an AUTO down fea ture Push the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go down automatically 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To open the window part way push the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the AUTO down operation pull up on the switch briefly The power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Uconnect Set tings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information TRUNK LOCK A
81. harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition 528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm CAUTION Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol based and or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats as damage to the seat may result CAUTION Direct contact of air fresheners insect repellents suntan lotions or hand sanitizers to the plastic painted or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause permanent damage Wipe away immediately CAUTION Damage c
82. holding the ESC Off button on the instrument panel switch bank for five seconds 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Listed below are the available Drive Modes Track Mode 10 10 54 Sport Custom Default Power 00 Transmissio Track Paddle Shift On Traction Track Suspension Track Track Set Up Race Options Eco CA T Cy CE Radio Controls Climate E Phone 0415080791 Drive Modes Track Pressing the Track button on the touchscreen will activate the configuration for typical track driving The Transmission Traction Steering and Suspension systems are all set to their Track settings highlighted in red The Paddle Shifters are enabled Sport Mode 10 10 Custom Default Power Transmission Paddle Shifters Traction Suspension Sport Set Up 3 TJ OFF Radio Media Controls Apps Climate av Phone 0415080792 Drive Modes Sport Pressing the Sport button on the touchscreen will activate the configuration for typical enthusiast driving The Traction Transmission Steering and Suspension systems are all set to their Sport settings highlighted in orange The Paddle Shifters are enabled Default Mode 10 10 Sport Custom Default Power Transmission Paddle Shift Traction Suspension Default Set Up Race Options Eco amp Apps Climate av Phone 0415080794 Radio Media Controls Drive Modes Default The vehic
83. hydraulic system is fed by a segregated volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder reservoir In the event of leakage or wear use only the manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Flu ids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Manual Transmission If Equipped Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the left side of the transmission The fluid level should be 1 4 inch 6 4mm below the bottom of the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Refer to Flu ids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Change Transmission Fluid If contaminated with water change the fluid immedi ately See your authorized dealer for service Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Automatic Transmission If Equipped Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life Use only the manufacturer s specified transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications It is important to maintain the 522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom mended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant should be
84. if the cover is rotated off to the side 3 Remove one fastener on the lower air box to remove and access the rear of the headlamp assembly 4 Reach behind the passenger headlamp assembly 5 Remove the headlamp cover 6 Turn the headlamp access cap counterclockwise to remove 7 Remove bulb by turn it counter clockwise and discon nect 8 Install new bulb by turning it clockwise and reconnect 9 Reinstall headlamp access cap by turning it clockwise and then reinstall headlamp cover 10 Reinstall engine air cleaner assembly Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp and Park Turn Lamp Models with High Intensity Discharge HID Headlamps If Equipped HID Headlamps The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb 546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service WARNING A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electro cution if not serviced properly See your authorized dealer for service NOTE On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps when the headlamps are turned on there is a blue hue to the lamps This diminishes and becomes more white after approxim
85. in coin holder designed to hold various size coins The center console may also be equipped with a Universal Consumer Interface UCI UCI supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Refer to Universal Consumer Interface UCI If Equipped in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information P CL Center Consafe WARNING Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position Driving with the console compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M REAR WINDOW FEATURES CAUTION Rear Window Defroster Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to The rear window defroster button is located on the heating elements the climate control Mode knob Press this button e Use care when washing the inside of the rear to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap heating elements Labels can be peeled off after proximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of soaking with warm water operation press the button a second time Do not use scrapers sharp instruments
86. in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission damage Dam age from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS 462 Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit 470 IF YOUR ENGINE 5 462 W JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES 476 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE Preparations For Jump Start SPECIFICATIONS 463 Jump Starting Procedure Torque 464 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE 480 TIRE SERVICE KIT IF EQUIPPED 465 MANUAL PARK RELEASE 8 SPEED Kat 465 TRANSMISSION 481 O Tire Service Kit Storage 466 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 485 Tire Service Kit Components And Operation 466 Automatic Transmission 486 Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions 467 Manual Transmission 462 WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES ME HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel A Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all direc tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
87. is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement Bulb Number Rear Courtesy Reading Lamps W5W Rear Compartment Trunk Lamp 562 Overhead Console Reading Lamps 578 Visor Vanity Lamps A6220 Glove Box Lamp If Equipped 194 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543 Bulb Number Door Courtesy 562 Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140 Optional Door Map Pocket Cupholder LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Exterior Bulbs For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions Bulb Number Headlamp High Intensity Discharge HID 035 Serviced at Authorized Dealer Halogen Headlamp HIR2LL Front Park Turn Lamp LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Front Fog Lamp H11LL Front Side Marker LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Tail Lamp LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Stop Turn Lamp LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Rear Side Marker SA SS LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer 544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Bulb Number Backup Lamp LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Center High Mount Stop Lamp CHMSL LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer License LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer The headlamps are a type of
88. is detected inside the vehicle and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected outside the vehicle The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions are true The doors are manually locked using the door lock knobs There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside the vehicle and within 5 ft 1 5 m of either Passive Entry door handle Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the door panel switch and then close the doors To Enter The Trunk With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the deck lid push the button located on the center of the light bar which is located on the deck lid above the license plate 0218042162 Trunk Passive Entry Button NOTE If you inadvertently leave your vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the deck lid the deck lid will automatically unlatch unless another one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmit ters is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft 1 5 m of the deck lid ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 To Lock The Vehicle s Doors Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters hano Paton Tis ine eoo within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver or passenger front door handles push the door handle LOCK button to lock both doors Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking 020273028 Push The Door Handl
89. is not long enough When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu pant it must be removed WARNING ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if when worn the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant s body is LESS than 6 inches Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 0226075266 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm Seat Belt Pretensioner The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices
90. is subject to the following two conditions 1 The device may not cause harmful interference 2 The device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration of the device Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Normal Fixed Speed Electronic Speed Conirol Mode In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode a Normal Fixed Speed Electronic Speed Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds The Normal Fixed Speed Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator Electronic Speed Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h To change between the different control modes push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC ON OFF button which turns the ACC and the NORMAL Fixed Speed ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF Pushing of the NORMAL Fixed Speed ELECTRONIC SPEED CON TROL ON OFF button will result in turning ON chang ing to the Normal Fixed Speed Electronic Speed Con trol mode 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING In the normal Cruise Control mode the system will not react to vehicles ahead In addition the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither the p
91. it is recom mended that a brake bleed procedure is performed to maintain the pedal feel and stopping capability of your Brembo High Performance brake system It is recommended that each track outing should end with a minimum of 1 cool down lap using minimal braking e If equipped with a removable lower front fascia grille it is recommended to remove it for track use during warm hot weather to improve cooling airflow to critical powertrain and cooling system components All SRT vehicles are track tested for 24 hours of endurance however it is recommended that suspen sion system brake system prop shaft and shaft boots should be checked for wear or damage after every track event Track usage results in increased operating tempera tures of the engine transmission clutch if equipped driveline and brake system This may affect noise NVH countermeasures designed into your vehicle New components may need to be installed to return the system to the original NVH performance Tire pressure e 40psi 276kpa hot recommend 32psi 221kpa front 30psi 207 kpa rear cold STARTING AND OPERATING 395 NOTE It is recommended that you target 40psi 276kpa Hot Tire Pressure at the conclusion of each track session Starting at 32psi 221kpa Front amp 30psi 207 kpa Rear Cold and adjusting based on ambient amp track conditions is recommended Tire pressure can be monitored via the Driver Information Display DI
92. least once a month Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket type pressure gauge Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage ee STARTING AND OPERATING 433 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a minimum of three hours The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side wall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa
93. light does not turn off please see your authorized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Green Telltale Indicator Lights Front Fog Indicator Light If Equipped Green Telltale Light What It Means 249 Front Fog Indicator Light This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on Park Headlight ON Indicator Light Green Telltale Light What It Means Park Headlight ON Indicator Light 00 This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Sg Turn Signal Indicator Lights Green Tell tale Light What It Means Turn Signal Indicator Lights The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn signal as se lected as well as the exterior turn signal lamp s front and rear as selected when the multi amp P function lever is moved down LEFT or up RIGHT NOTE e A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on e Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 Electronic Speed Control Set Indicator Light Green Telltale Light Electronic Speed Control Set Indicator Light What It Means This light will turn on when the electronic speed control has been set Blue Te
94. limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stopping surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you distances Therefore after driving through stand ing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes e Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your pas sengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Cautions and Warnings before doing so ee STARTING AND OPERATING 399 CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle e Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water e Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects POWER STEERING 6 4L ENGINE e Driving through standing water may cause damage The electric power steering system will give you good to your vehicle s drivetrain components Always vehic
95. may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Man agement feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors ALR The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR which is used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section of this manual The table below defines the type of feature for each seating position 022669137 ALR Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped w
96. miles 0 to 161 km Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an extended period of time e Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration e Avoid aggressive braking Drive with the engine speed less than 3 500 RPM Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph 88 km h and observe local speed limits 100 to 300 miles 161 to 483 km Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration in lower gears 1st to 3rd gears Avoid aggressive braking Drive with the engine speed less than 5 000 RPM Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph 112 km h and observe local speed limits 300 to 500 miles 483 to 805 km Exercise the full engine rpm range shifting manually paddles or gear shift at higher rpms when possible Do not perform sustained operation with the accelera tor pedal at wide open throttle Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph 136 km h and observe local speed limits For the first 1500 mi 2414 km Do not participate in track events sport driving schools or similar activities during the first 1500 mi 2414 km 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR NOTE Check engine oil with every refueling and add if WARNING Continued necessary Oil and fuel consumption may be higher n through the first oil change interval Running the engine It is extremely dangerous
97. minutes to ensure joos location Mucky proceed to D distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire De ence Do not exceed 55 mph 90 km h CAUTION WARNING The metal end fitting from Power Plug 5 may get Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair hot after use so it should be handled carefully Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end using Tire Service Kit Do not exceed 55 mph 90 of the Sealant Hose 6 can result in sealant con km h until the tire is repaired or replaced Failure to tacting your skin clothing and the vehicle s inte follow this warning can result in injuries that are e pian 4 internal Serious or fatal to you your passengers and others ire Service Kit components which may cause around you permanent damage to the kit 474 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE E After Driving Pull over to a safe location Refer to Whenever You Stop to Use Tire Service Kit before continuing 1 Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to the Air Mode position Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet Uncoil the Air Pump Hose 7 black in color and screw the fitting at the end of hose 7 onto the valve stem Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge 3 If tire pressure is less than 19 psi 1 3 Bar
98. moving a maximum of obstructions and blind spots before backing up Fail approximately 20 mph 32 km h such as in parking lot ure to do so can result in serious injury or death situations 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Modes Of Operation Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion Blind Spot Alert Lights Only When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object However when the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio volume is reduced Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro priate side view mirror based on a detected object If the turn signal is then activated and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle an audible chime will also be sounded Whenever a turn signal and de tected object are present on the same side at the same time both the visual and audio alerts will be issued In addition to the audible alert the radio if on volume will be reduced NOTE e Whenever an audible alert is
99. of shift speed and comfort for typical daily driving Paddles If Equipped On enables steering wheel mounted paddle shifters e Off disables steering wheel mounted paddle shift ers Traction e Track modifies traction control to optimize track performance with the least stability control e Sport turns off traction control and reduces stability control e Street provides full traction control and full stability control Suspension Susp e Track provides the firmest possible suspension stiffness with the highest amount of comfort trade off e Sport provides a firmer suspension stiffness with moderate comfort trade off e Street provides a balance of suspension stiffness and ride comfort for typical daily driving Steering 6 4L Engine Only e Track provides the greatest amount of steering feedback requiring the highest amount of steering effort e Sport provides greater steering feedback requiring greater steering effort e Street provides a balance of steering feedback and steering effort 388 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Engine Power 6 2L Supercharged Engine Only e 700 HP Provides engine output power to 700 horsepower NOTE This selection is only available with the RED RKE Key Fob 700 HP e 500 HP Provides engine output power to 500 horsepower NOTE This selection is available with the RED or BLACK RKE Key Fob 500 HP
100. on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Outside Mirrors Folding Feature The mirrors are equipped with a rotational hinge The mirrors have one detent clockwise towards the rear of the vehicle and three detent s counterclockwise towards the front of the vehicle Folding Mirrors UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the driver side door trim panel cmm Power Mirror Controls The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but tons and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a mirror push either the L left or R right to select the mirror that you want to adjust NOTE A light in the selected button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted Using the mirror control switch push on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want
101. on the left side of the instrument panel 0313042086 Dimmer Controls With the parking lights or headlights on rotating the left dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders if equipped 0313042087 Instrument Panel Dimmer Dome Light Position Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Interior Light Defeat OFF Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer Driver Information Display DID and radio when the position lights or headlights are on WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON RUN or ACC position The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE mist LO 031563089 Windshield Wiper Washer Lever Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wip
102. operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine After placing the ignition to the ON RUN position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electron ics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION e Do not make modifications or alterations to the immobilizer system Modifications or alterations to the immobilization system may result in a loss of security protection Continued CAUTION Continued The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some aftermarket remote starting sys tems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only K
103. or mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall Use Summer tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle WARNING Do not use Summer tires in snow ice conditions You could lose vehicle control resulting in severe injury or death Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control 436 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter Snow tires can be identified by a mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the origi nal equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types Tire Spinning When stuck in mud san
104. previous menu or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings Display After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Display Mode When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings To change Mode status press and re lease the Manual or Auto button on the touchscreen Display Brightness With Headlights ON When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights on Adjust the brightness from 1 10 with the and buttons on the touchscreen NOTE To make changes to the Display Brightness with Headlights ON setting the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or parade positions Display Brightness With Headlights OFF When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights off Adjust the brightness from 1 10 with the and buttons on the touchscreen NOTE To make changes to the Display Brightness with Headlights OFF setting the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or parade positions 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Set Theme When in this display you may select the theme for the display screen Cha
105. quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The Advanced Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger and position the front occu pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags WARNING Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Side Air Bags Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags 1 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SABs Located in the outboard side of the front seats The SABs are marked with a SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG label sewn into the outboard side of the seats 0218042168 Front Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts and or vehicle rollover events in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure E THINGS T
106. rear region and will produce a one half second tone As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from slow to fast to continuous If an obstacle is detected in the left and or right rear region the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and or right rear region and will produce a fast sound tone As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from fast to continuous 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 0327045850 0327045851 Single 1 2 Second Tone Solid Arc Slow Tone Solid Arc UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 TY 0327045853 0327045854 Fast Tone Flashing Arc Continuous Tone Flashing Arc The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert opera tion when the system is detecting an obstacle 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING ALERTS Rear Distance Greater 79 59 in 59 47 in 47 39in 39 25in 25 12in Less than in cm than 79 in 200 150 cm 150 120 120 100 100 65 65 30 12 in 200 cm cm cm cm cm 30 cm Audible Alert None Single 1 2 Second Slow Slow Fast Fast Continu Chime Tone for rear for rear fo
107. restraints be removed Yes Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact Center Only may be removed Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat 5 N oo THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 To lock the seat belt pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor Then allow the webbing to retract back into th
108. session Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands Repeat to listen to the system prompts again Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system s status Cues appear on the touch screen UconnectPhone Toa Phone Ready Do Not Disturb phonebook recent calls messaging ings say a mime 1 Say jel r Cancel TX i NY psa A Manager Apps Climate Radio 0307077986 1 Media Phone Settings Uconnect 8 4A 8 4AN es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 Radio Use your voice to quickly get to the AM FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear Subscrip tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required Push the VR button 4694 After the beep say e Tune to ninety five point five FM e Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1 TIP At any time if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command push the VR button say Help system will provide you with a list of commands 6 107 9 5 105 1 Classic Rock 94 7 HD 12 WCSX FM 94 7 WCSX Detroits browse eS Tuning to 94 7 FM Be qb BU SH Media pps Settings Hi tune Pi ZEN Orr Phone Climate Radio 0307077987 Uconnect 8 4A 8 4AN Radio Media Uconnect offers connections via USB SD Bluetooth and auxiliary ports If Equipped Voice operation is only available for connected USB and AUX devices Remote CD player o
109. setting has been selected 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks When Driver Door is selected with Ist Press Of Key Fob Unlocks only the driver s door will unlock with the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button You must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When All Doors is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks all doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button NOTE If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks All Doors all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door is pro grammed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door is programmed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If Driver Door is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors or use RKE transmitter Passive Entry If Equipped This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door s without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter LOCK or UNLOCK buttons To make your selection press the Passive Entry button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL setting sh
110. slide the tempera ture bar button towards the red arrow for warmer tempera ture settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time Climate Control Functions A C Air Conditioning The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When the air conditioning system is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin For improved fuel economy press the A C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings Also make sure to select only Panel Bi Level or Floor modes 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se NOTE For Manual Climate Controls if the system is in Mix Floor or Defrost Mode the A C can be turned off but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows e If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if needed If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser lo cated in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance MAX A C MAX A C sets the control for ma
111. speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles Continued WARNING Continued you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always shift an automatic transmission into PARK or a manual transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE turn the engine OFE apply the parking brake and remove the ignition key If equipped with Keyless Enter N Go always make sure the keyless ignition node is in OFF mode When the ignition is in the LOCK or OFF key removal mode an automatic transmission is locked in PARK securing the ve hicle against unwanted movement When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a Continued 378 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Continued DO NOT race the engine when shifting from WARNING Continued number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal
112. temperatures The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity Use Pennzoil Ultra 0W 40 engine or equivalent MOPAR oil meeting the FCA US Material Standard MS 12633 for use in all operating temperatures The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion 500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental a
113. the icon on your touchscreen you have the Uconnect 8 4AN system If not you have a Uconnect 8 4A system es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337 Get Started All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel 1 Visit UconnectPhone com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions 2 Reduce background noise Wind and passenger con versations are examples of noise that may impact recognition 3 Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver 0415029586 Uconnect Voice Command 4 Each time you give a Voice Command you must first 1 Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call Send Or Re push either the VR or Phone button wait until after ceive A Text the beep then say your Voice Command 2 For All Radios Push To Begin Radio Or Media functions For 8 4A 8 4AN Only Push To Begin Navigation Apps And Climate 5 You can interrupt the help message or system prompts Functions by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice Push To End Call Command from current category 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Basic Voice Commands The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect system Push the VR button 4698 After the beep say e Cancel to stop a current voice
114. the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR STARTING AND OPERATING 457 Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate NOTE Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR I5 and GAWRs TRAILER TOWING Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended 458 STARTING AND OPERATING Se RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
115. the driver with a visual indication within the DID display when the driver configured gear shift point has been reached and the driver is still accelerating This indication notifies the driver to change gear corre sponding to the configured RPMs in the head unit When the shift up indicator is shown on the display the PSI is advising the driver to engage a higher gear The PSI indicator in the DID display remains illuminated until the driver changes gear or the driving conditions return to a situation where changing gear is not required corresponding to the configured RPMs in the head unit 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se NOTE Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information on en abling disabling and configuring the Performance Shift Indicator Cruise Control This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell tales These telltales include e Cruise Ready This telltale will illuminate white to indicate that the Adaptive Cruise Control system is activated e Electronic Speed Control SET pr This telltale will illuminate green when the elec tronic speed control is SET Refer to Electronic Speed Control in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information DID Selectable Menu Items Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until the desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the DID Follow the Menu or submenu prom
116. the ignition or closing the door will allow the locks to operate If a door is open with the ignition either cycled to ACC or RUN engine not running a chime will sound as a reminder Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or through the Uconnect Settings in your radio ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature The doors will unlock automatically if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en KEYLESS ENTER N GO abled The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed vehicle s Remote Keyless Entry RKE system and a returned to 0 mph 0 km h feature of Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows you to 55 lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to 3 The transmission is in PARK push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons 4 The driver door is opened NOTE 5 The doors were not previously unlocked e Passive Entry may be programmed ON OFF refer to 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information Automatic Unlock Doors O
117. the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint e After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attach ments Remove the child restraint before adjusting All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held the vehicle seat position When the vehicle seat has been adjusted reinstall the child restraint e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in in the vehicle by the seat belt the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor WARNING Improper installation can lead to failure of an ages or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause infant or child restraint
118. the steering wheel is pointing straight Launch control will abort before launch completion display Launch Aborted in the cluster under any the following conditions s The accelerator pedal is released during launch 6 Hold the brake and make sure the vehicle is in Drive 7 While holding the brake rapidly apply the accelerator pedal to wide open throttle The engine speed will hold at the RPM that was set in the Launch RPM The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer Set up screen moving in a straight line NOTE Messages will appear in the Driver Information The ESC OFF button is pressed to change the system Display DID to inform the driver if one or more of the another mode above conditions have not been met NOTE After launch control has been aborted ESC will 8 When conditions 4 through 7 have been met the return to its current ESC mode Driver Information Display DID will read Launch Ready Release Brake 392 STARTING AND OPERATING Manual Transmission If Equipped Vehicles with a manual transmission have an adjustable launch RPM controlled through the Uconnect system Launch Control is only available when the following procedure is followed 1 Pushing the LAUNCH button on the center stack switch bank NOTE Pushing the SRT button on the center stack or pressing the Apps button on the touchscreen are two other options to access launch control featu
119. their normal position see your authorized dealer immediately 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Head Restraint 1 Release Button 2 Adjustment Button 3 Seat Belt Loop To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint push the adjust ment button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint To remove the head restraint remove the seat belt from the seat belt loop Raise the head restraint as far as it can go then push the adjustment button and the release button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up To reinstall the head restraint put the head restraint posts into the holes while pushing the adjust ment button and release button Then adjust it to the appropriate height ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 WARNING Folding Rear Seat The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area Pull on the loops located on the upper part of the rear seatback to fold down either or both seatbacks These loops can be tucked away when im not in use A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the o
120. time should be done by an experienced technician WARNING CAUTION Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are chemicals damage your canai flammable and can explode injuring you Other tioning components Such damage is not covered by unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the the New Vehicle Limited Warranty system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information Continued 506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a If Equipped R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf If Equipped HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro fluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product with a low GWP Global Warming Potential However the manufa
121. to Restraints in this Vehicle be used for adult seat belts harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor If it is locked the ALR will ALR Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor Refer to the Automatic Locking Mode description under Occupant Restraints for ad ditional information on ALR Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child restraint for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat Can the head
122. to open only when the air bags are inflating Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags Advanced Front Air Bag Operation Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts Ad vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Ad vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large
123. to the SD Card e Press the Uconnect button to save the runs to the Owner web page e Press the Cancel button to view the last timer Ticket The Tickets contain the timers listed below e Reaction Time Measures the driver s reaction time for launching the vehicle against a simulated drag strip timing light be havior modeled after 500 Sportsman Tree displayed in the Driver Information Display DID NOTE The Reaction Time MPH and Mile timers will be ready when the vehicle is at 0 MPH 0 km h ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 0 60 MPH 0 100 km h Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph 0 to 100 km h 0 100 MPH 0 160 km h Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to 100 mph 0 to 160 km h e Mile 200 meter Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an mile 200 meters e 14 Mile 400 meter Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an mile 400 meters e Brake Distance Displays the distance it takes the vehicle to make a full stop Contains current and last data for distance and start from speed NOTE The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a complete stop Brake Speed Displays the speed the vehicle is traveling when the brake pedal is depressed NOTE Brake Distance and Speed timers will only dis play rea
124. to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar To change the Show Time Status setting press the Show Time in Status Bar button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting has been selected Safety amp Driving Assistance After pressing the Safety amp Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available Forward Collision Warning If Equipped The Front Collision Warning FCW feature provides an audible and or visual warning to potential forward collisions The feature can be can be set to Far or set to Near The default status of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time To change the setting for more dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you To change the FCW status press and release the Near or Far button For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Paddle Shifters If Equipped When this feature is selected the paddle shifters can be enabled or disabled Select the Enable or Disable button on the touchscreen e ParkSense If Equipped Th
125. transmission provides precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers STARTING AND OPERATING 375 Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears The transmission shift lever has PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL DRIVE and MANUAL Autostick shift positions Manual shifts can be made using the Autostick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section for further information Toggling the shift lever forward or rearward while in the MANUAL AutoStick position beside the DRIVE position will manually select the transmission gear and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as M1 M2 M3 etc 376 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK REVERSE or NEUTRAL position when pushed for ward it is probably in the MANUAL AutoStick position beside the DRIVE position In MANUAL AutoStick mode the transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster as M1 M2 M3 etc Move the shift lever to the right into the DRIVE D position for access to PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when sh
126. truck tire based on U S design standards or T or Temporary spare tire or 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 235 145 Section width in millimeters mm 65 85 80 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire or 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction or D means diagonal or bias construction 15 16 18 Rim diameter in inches in 422 STARTING AND OPERATING EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire e XL Extra load or reinforced tire or e LL Light load tire or e C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tir
127. until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indi cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained 4 Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you are programming 5 Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE e If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels If you unplugged the garage door opener device for programming plug it back in at this time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button Canadian Gate Operator To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Canadian Gate Operator Programming step 2 and follow all remaining steps Using HomeLink To operate push and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the programmed device i e garage
128. used CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives Therefore do not add any fluid additives to the transmission Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions Routine fluid level checks are not required therefore the transmis sion has no dipstick Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523 If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis sion damage CAUTION If a transmission
129. warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire STARTING AND OPERATING 443 The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM Telltale Light illu minates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale Light to turn off The system will auto matically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the TPM Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only afte
130. will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the button is released The decrease in set speed is re flected in the DID Metric Speed kmlh Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km h If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km h increments until the button is released The decrease in set speed is re flected in the DID NOTE e When you override and push the SET button or SET buttons the new Set Speed will be the current speed of the vehicle 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE e When you use the SET button to decelerate if the engine s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle The ACC system applies the brake down to 15 mph 24 km h when following a target vehicle The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill However a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal In addition downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending down hill This is normal operation and necessary to main tain set speed When driving up hill and down hill the ACC
131. will turn off 3 Recirculation Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON 4 AUTO Operation Button Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes Refer to Automatic Operation for more information 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 5 Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode The indicator illuminates when this fea ture is ON Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets When the defrost button is selected the blower level will increase Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting 6 Rear Defrost Button Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window
132. with the low tire pressure values shown in a different color An Inflate Tire to XX message will also be displayed in the DID Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate all of the tires with a low pressure condition those shown in a different color in the DID graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure infla tion value as shown in the Inflate Tire to XX message Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the DID will return the pressure values shown to their original color and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Service TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the DID will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash and the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashe
133. you push and hold the hand held transmitter button Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 Firmly push and release the LEARN or TRAIN ING button On some garage door openers devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pushed 6 Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete NOTE If the garage door opener device does not acti vate push the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button Rolling Code To reprogram a channel that has been previously train
134. 0 miles 240 000 km before replacement To prevent reduc ing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant OAT coolant conform ing to MS 90032 throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology OAT engine coolant antifreeze that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS 90032 When adding engine coolant antifreeze e We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology that meets the requirements of FCA Ma terial Standard MS 90032 Mix a minimum solution of 50 OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS 90032 and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated 516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE e Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe in
135. 0000 m Rey eme 153 To Ac vale eod ane mee neds 154 Set A Desired Speed 154 To Deactivate eae em ex he e tees 155 To Resume Speed 2 2 2 155 To Vary The Speed Setting 155 To Accelerate For Passing ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC To 161 To Set A Desired ACC Speed 162 TO hte noii e ees as 163 To Turn Off s seem erre ates 163 lo Resum 3084008048554 G0 REY 163 To Vary The Speed Setting 164 Setting The Following Distance In ACC 166 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 170 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF Overtake Aid Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu Display Warnings And Maintenance Precautions While Driving With ACC General Normal Fixed Speed Electronic Speed Control 24422 90824 es FORWARD COLLISION WARNING FCW IF EQUIPPED mete kRrPER RESET Forward Collision Warning FCW Operation Turning FCW ON Or Changing FCW
136. 0002 0009 000 o e z 0 n u zoo0tg es t 25 5558 59049545 0 ootao9 oot loog z OS OE 25928 c950 c 85 es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 561 000 08 8 ooo osz x 7 000 3 0000 000861 8 000962 N ooo zer o00 0zz amp 000 921 amp 00012 e ooo ozt amp o00 00z x 00 4 00061 000801 00098 N ooo zor S 00091 00096 000 091 0006 2 000 0 x 000 8 2 00096 00087 00096 00027 amp 00001 00099 00004 00009 000 0 ooo rs 00006 0008 9 00008 002 S 000 07 00096 9 00009 00006 00005 000 2 2 00006 0008 9 00006 ooo zt 00002 0009 00091 o o i 1 D LL hD 5 2 88 zpo98289g4 u wes 8 lt 2 ge 2 89 8 gt O 9 voU75o0zc97 090 89go o0 z X o5o22250 t truo iu 562 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 000 08 8 ooo osz 000 3 0000 2 x 000861 8 000962 N ooo zer 00022 amp 000921 8 000012 n e 000021 amp 00002 00 4 00061 00080 oooo8L x ooo zor S 00091 00096 000091 00006 2 00009
137. 400 meters in less then 25 seconds To clear the vehicle s best 1 4 mile 400 meters run push and hold the OK button for two seconds Braking Distance When selected this screen displays the vehicle s braking distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was pushed This feature will only function when applying the brakes at speeds above 30 mph 48 km h e Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature The word READY will display when conditions are met for the event to begin The distance and speed measurements display while the event is taking place The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com plete stop UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 e Pushing and holding the OK button will clear the current and last run values Current G Force When selected this screen displays the current G Force lateral and longitudinal that displays the directions of the forces Peak G Force When selected this screen displays all four G Force values two lateral and two longitudinal e When a force greater than zero is measured the display will update the value as it climbs As the G Force falls the peak forces will continue to display e Push and hold the OK button to clear the peak force values Lap Timer When selected the Lap Timer page will show the timer always at 0 00 00 with the previous Best and Last time
138. 423 a f mm Replacement 438 Tire Terminology And Definitions 424 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 426 BE CH CEC TION DEVENS d E TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION 431 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS 440 Tire Rotation Same Tire Size On Front And Tire PIESSUTE ebat eg 431 Rear Axle nus Rech eei 441 358 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Rotation Different Tire Size On Front Carbon Monoxide Warnings 452 BOREAS M ADDING 453 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS 442 Fuel Filler Cap Gas 453 Premium 5 445 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 455 General Information 0 448 B VEHICLE LOADING 455 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 448 Vehicle Certification Label 455 6 2L Supercharged And 6 4L Engine SP aie 448 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR PERLE 456 Reformulated Gasoline e Mine o es cd 449 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR VPE 456 456 E 85 Usage Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 450 Loading 457 a dad
139. 5 g i E 3 3 H i i O T 210 2 i i l 4 i E 8 i 3 eLecraome CONTROL OFF 010533317 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owner s Manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cau tions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and the title 010805185 VIN Location The vehicle identification number VIN is also located on the right front strut tower inside the engine compart ment INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death 010840680 VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Es
140. 9 1 1 Call system and the 9 1 1 operator the 9 1 1 operator may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed Once the 9 1 1 operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle s 9 1 1 Call system the operator should be able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle The vehicle s 9 1 1 Call system will attempt to re main connected with the 9 1 1 operator until the 9 1 1 operator terminates the connection 5 The 9 1 1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate emergency responders and provide them with impor tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates e If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger e g fire or smoke is visible dangerous road conditions or location do not wait for voice contact from a 9 1 1 operator All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location Never place anything on or near the vehicle s operable 1X voice data or 3G data network and GPS antennas You could prevent operable 1X voice data or 3G data network and GPS signal reception which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call An operable 1X voice data or 3G data network and GPS signal recep tion is required for the 9 1 1 Call system to function properly e The 9 1 1 Call system is embedded into the vehi cle s electrical system Do not add aftermarket Continued WARNING Continued electrical equ
141. ALET Mode the operator must enter the same four digit PIN that was used to enter the mode The unlock keypad can be accessed by either pushing the SRT button or selecting to disable Valet on the Uconnect touchscreen e The vehicle will restart with VALET active if VALET was active when the vehicle was last shut down Eco Automatic Transmission only Eco modifies the vehicle s engine and transmission settings to pro vide improved fuel economy at a trade off with accel eration performance Increased engine exhaust noise and or vibration may be noticed while Eco is active this is normal and will not damage the vehicle NOTE Changing the Drive Mode will deactivate Eco Launch Mode If Equipped This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system that is designed to allow the driver to achieve maximum vehicle acceleration in a straight line Launch Control is a form of traction control that manages tire slip while launching the vehicle This feature is intended for use during race events on a closed course where consistent quarter mile and zero to sixty times are desired The system is not intended to compensate for lack of driver experience or familiarity with the race track Use of this 390 STARTING AND OPERATING Se feature in low traction cold wet gravel etc conditions may results in excess wheel slip outside this systems control resulting in an aborted launch NOTE Launch mode is not available within the firs
142. ARK then push and release the ENGINE START STOP button 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever is not in PARK the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short pushes in a row and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the vehicle is stopped placed PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF position If the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pushed once the Driver Information Display DID will display a VEHICLE NOT IN PARK message and the engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button Manual Transmission Only E 1 With the vehicle stopped place the shift lever in NEUTRAL then push and release the ENGINE START STOP button 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 Place the shift lever in first gear or REVERSE and then apply the parking brake 364 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE e If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position the system will aut
143. C system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions such as mud dirt or ice In these cases the DID will display ACC FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor and the system will deactivate The ACC FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas i e tunnels with reflective tiles or ice and snow The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas Under rare conditions when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur NOTE If the ACC FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor warning is active Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still available For additional information refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section If weather conditions are not a factor the driver should examine the sensor It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To keep the ACC System operating properly it is impor tant to note the following maintenance items e Always keep the sensor clean Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens Do not remove any screws from the sensor Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment e
144. Capacity 426 428 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 442 Pressure Warning 243 Quality Grading 575 Radial 4543 00 434 Replacements dcs re ce been ed 438 eR ae Ra ea 440 Safety 419 431 SIZES eR eae 421 SHOW atus iac ee d 436 SPINNING 55 abe edet d 436 Tread Wear Indicators 437 Tire Safety Information 419 Tire Service Kit 465 466 467 470 471 473 474 475 Io Open Hood ihn e REL hehe 135 Top 5peed nis eem e CR ine o RUE genes 264 SRE 5 fiu 264 TOWING sce uode ere cbr 457 Disabled Vehicle 485 486 487 Recreational 458 Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome 458 Tracti n s 23e REX erra Ger x P ERG 396 Traction Control 0 0 0 0 ee 412 Trailer Towing Rm Rd 457 Transfer Case mE Sis Aig Gh ae Ave oa 549 TkansmussiOB Rae 521 Automatic isses e 372 374 521 Fid uus ERE ES 521 549 551 v CAPE E PU Pet 367 Sh fling neutre beoe s des e 370 372 INDEX 597 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless
145. Climate Radio 0307077993 SiriusXM Travel Link Siri Eyes Free If Equipped If your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free you can use your voice to send text messages schedule meetings set reminders and more For further information go to the Mopar Owner Connect website moparownerconnect com UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353 Do Not Disturb With Do Not Disturb you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel For your conve nience there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message a call or both when declining an incoming call and send it to voicemail Automatic reply messages can be e am driving right now I will get back to you shortly Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters NOTE Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the touchscreen while typing a custom message While in Do Not Disturb Conference Call can be selected so you can still place a second call without being inter rupted by incoming calls NOTE Reply with text message is not compatible with iP hones Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Ope
146. D and can assist with adjustments Track burnishing your brakes To avoid green lining fade during track use the brake pads and rotors must have a thermal burnish for factory installed components or when new brake friction com ponents are installed 1 Use one track session to burnish brakes by driving at 75 speed Brake at approximately 0 60 0 80g max without ABS intervention 2 Lap the track in this manner until you start smelling the brakes Continue for another lap at speed then do a two lap cool down with minimal brake applies Make sure the brakes are not smoking If they are do another cool down lap Do not continue for more than 1 full burnishing lap after you start smelling the brakes Do not get them smoking heavily This will get them too hot and affect their life negatively in future track use Allow vehicle to sit and cool in the paddock for at least 30 min If an infrared thermal gun is available allow rotors to cool to 200 F 93 3 C before going back out There should be a thin ash layer when inspecting the pads installed in the caliper Having the ash layer go more than half the thickness of the pad material indicates too aggressive of a burnish 396 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 6 Sometimes a second burnish session is required If the pads start smelling in the next track session reduce speed and braking decel to burnish targets and follow step 2 4 New pads installed
147. DEX 593 Pregnant ius tans Pace ew be Res 52 Pretensioners 52 Rear Seat 46 227 Untwisting Procedure 50 Sats infa V GP ATO faeces 123 124 126 130 Adjustment ecce e ree 123 124 Head Restraints 131 Heated uu as VR RE ate a RS 126 Height Adjustment 124 POWER 22x cadie ia iadi En Rex 124 Rear Folding 133 Seatback 133 THN is eg Hye RRRRR SERRE 124 130 Vented s sse bua ex Ra hd E eR CR en 128 Ventilated ss ser ex ea a 128 Security AIarm ux us eed e Ro es s 19 231 Arm The Syste es auae eg 24 40 he ees 19 Disarm The System sai pedore Re er 20 594 Selection Of Coolant Antifreeze 549 550 Selection Of Oil 499 SENTRY KEY FCC General Information 18 Key Programming 44 s 4 18 Sentry Key Immobilizer 16 Sentry Key 17 Service 569 Service Contract ds A CR aras 571 Service 5 574 Shift Indicator Light 371 Shif ng PES oa 372 Auto
148. DID display Metric Speed km h e Pushing the SET button once will result in a 1 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km h If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km h increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the DID display To Decrease Speed When the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is set you can decrease speed by pushing the SET button The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under standing Your Instrument Panel for more information The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed of U S mph or Metric km h units U S Speed mph e Pushing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the button is released The decrease in set speed is re flected in the DID display 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Metric Speed km h e Pushing the SET button once will result in a 1 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km h e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km h decrements until the butto
149. EHICLE 5 Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap e If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts SRT ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS SRT Engine Break In Recommendations The following tips will be helpful in obtaining optimum performance and maximum durability for your new SRT Vehicle Despite modern technology and World Class manufac turing methods the moving parts of the vehicle must still wear in with each other This wearing in occurs mainly during the first 500 miles 805 km and continues through the first oil change interval ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 It is recommended for the operator to observe the following driving behaviors during the new vehicle break in period 0 to 100
150. EUTRAL 30 mph 48 km h max speed 30 miles 48 km max distance Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED Rear NOT RECOMMENDED Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose following equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to or associated brackets State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed 486 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position CAUTION Do not use sling type equipment when towing Vehicle damage may occur When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may occur from improper towing The manufacturer does not recommend towing this vehicle using a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur Automatic Transmission The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed If flatbed equipment is not available and the transmis sion is operable the vehicle may be flat towed with all four wheels on the ground under the following condi tions e The transmission must be in
151. Electronic Brake Controller EBC to calculate the probability of a forward collision When the system determines that a forward collision is probable the driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings BRAKE 0323001258 FCW Message When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable the warning message will be deactivated 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the NOTE The minimum speed for FCW activation is 5 mph 10 km h e The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the course prediction This is expected and is a part of normal FCW activation and functionality The FCW system is intended for on road use only If the vehicle is taken off road the FCW system should be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the surroundings WARNING Forward Collision Warning FCW is not intended to avoid a collision on its own nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision The driver has the Continued vehicle via braking and steering Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death Turning FCW ON Or OFF NOTE The default status of FCW is On this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you The forward collision but
152. Entry 25 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 24 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry 22 Transporting Pets i ee eee 90 Tread Wear Indicators 437 Trunk Lid Deck Lid sa rms 40 42 Trunk Release 42 Trunk Release Remote 40 Turn Signals 142 250 Customer Programmable Features 282 Operation se vsum PERS Ae ale Fee a 319 Uconnect Settings Uconnect 8 4A 8 4AN Voice Recognition Additional Information 354 Do Not Disturb 353 General Information 353 Siri Eyes sodes eruere eee 352 Uconnect Access Vehicle Health Alert ore 346 Uconnect Settings ia ede ed RET eda Rene ies 23 Customer Programmable Features 280 Passive Entry Programming 280 Uconnect Setings sus eer dn 280 Uconnect Voice 336 Uniform Tire Quality 575 Unleaded Gasoline 448 Untwisting Procedure Seat 50 Vanity MUrrOLS aea ee bea UR a eee DS Vehicle Certification Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle Loading Vehicle Modifications Alteratio
153. G x NOTE e e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only Temporary high pressure com pact spare tires have the letter or S molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT ee STARTING AND OPERATING 421 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Example Size Designation P215 65R15XL 95H 215 65R15 96H LT235 85R16C T145 80D18 103M 31x10 5 R15 LT P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards or Passenger car tire based on European design standards or LT Light
154. Heated Cupholders Rear Heated Seat Switches If Equipped 53 10 Amp Red HVAC Module In Car Temperature Sensor 54 Fuse Spare 55 Fuse Spare 56 Fuse Spare 57 Fuse Spare 58 10 Amp Red Airbag Module MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 59 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals Police 60 5 Heated Washer Nozzles LD 61 Fuse Spare 62 Fuse Spare 63 Fuse Spare 64 25 Amp Breaker Rear Windows LD LX 65 10 Amp Red Airbag Module 66 Fuse Spare 67 10 Amp Red Rain and Light Sensor Sunroof Inside RR View Mirror Power Outlet Illumination Center Console Police Run Acc Relay 68 10 Amp Red Dual USB Power Outlet Sense LD LX Rear Sunshade LD LX 69 Fuse Spare 70 Fuse Spare 542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take these steps to protect your battery Disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service e g vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will Interior Bulbs ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system
155. ICLE 105 9 1 1 Call 1 Push the 9 1 1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror NOTE In case the 9 1 1 Call button is pushed in error there will be a 10 second delay before the 9 1 1 Call system initiates a call to a 9 1 1 operator To cancel the 9 1 1 Call connection push the 9 1 1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Device Screen Termination of the 9 1 1 Call will turn off the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror 2 The LED light located between the ASSIST and 9 1 1 buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a connection to a 9 1 1 operator has been made 3 Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9 1 1 operator is made the 9 1 1 Call system may transmit the following important vehicle information to a 9 1 1 operator Indication that the occupant placed a 9 1 1 Call e The vehicle brand e The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle 4 You should be able to speak with the 9 1 1 operator through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed WARNING ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road Some Uconnect Access services including 9 1 1 and Assist will NOT work without an operable 1X voice data or 3G data network connection 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE WARNING Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber Once a connection is made between the vehicle s
156. ING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons 1 NORMAL FIXED SPEED CRUISE CONTROL ON OFF 2 SET ACCEL 3 RESUME 4 SET DECEL 5 DISTANCE SETTING INCREASE 6 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC ON OFF 7 DISTANCE SETTING DECREASE 8 CANCEL NOTE Any chassis suspension or tire size modifications to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h The system will cancel when the vehicle speed drops below 15 mph 24 km h The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph 32 km h When the system is turned on and in the READY state the Driver Information Display DID displays ACC Ready When the system is OFF the DID displays Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Off UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 NOTE You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions e When you apply the brakes e When the parking brake is set 3 e When the automatic transmission is in PARK RE A C C R e a d y VERSE or NEUTRAL e When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range e When the brakes are overheated e When the ESC is in Full off mode 0323001278 Adaptive Cruise Control Ready To turn the system OFF push and release the Adaptive Push and releas
157. ING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical 0202008030 latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways Emergency Key Removal with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 2 Separating RKE halves requires screw removal if equipped and gently prying the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 0213004940 Separating Keyless Ignition Node KIN Transmitter Case 3 Remove the battery by turning the back cover over battery facing downward and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar then replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on the back cover Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 4 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together reposition and secure the screw as shown in step 2 for removal General Information The
158. If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS IMPORTANT The warning indicator light switches on in the instrument panel together with a dedicated mes sage and or acoustic signal when applicable These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and or alternative to the information contained in the Owner Manual which you are advised to read carefully in all cases Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication All active telltales will display first if applicable The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status Some telltales are optional and may not appear UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 Red Telltale Indicator Lights Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver seat belt remains un buckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Thin
159. KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 0202008030 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up 0202003287 Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Ignition Or Accessory On Message When opening the driver s door when the ignition is in ACC or ON engine not running a chime will sound to remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF In addition to the chime the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster NOTE With the Uconnect system the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation WARNING When leaving the vehicle always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode re move the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A ch
160. N 4 23 26 EUR E RIT pa ee B a RE Dope a da n e do SS ER Pe 3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR 9 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 STARTING AND OPERATING 53 21 53 aUe kr RR be dead d eA EC 355 10 INDEX sarioa oe Dra AR MO REC Ubro EP CA db ade RC 577 a gt J 2 lt 2 Q Eri Ss m INTRODUCTION CONTENTS B INTRODUCTION 4 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 6 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 4 BM VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS 7 E WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 6 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workman ship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publicati
161. ND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pushing the Trunk Release button The button is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel NOTE The transmission must be in PARK before the button will operate If equipped with a manual transmis sion the vehicle speed must be under 5 mph 8 km h before the button will operate The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pushing the Trunk Release button on the Re mote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter twice within five seconds or by using the external release switch located on the underside of the decklid overhang The release feature will function only when the vehicle is in the unlock condition Trunk Release Button ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 With the ignition switch in the ON RUN position the Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key removed from the ignition switch the Trunk Open sym bol will display until the trunk is closed Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for more information on trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or
162. NDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL aa gu VU Media Settings Apps Climate Valet Mode Deactivation PIN The Valet Mode Deactivation key pad will then prompt you for your 4 digit PIN code enter your PIN code and press the OK button on the touchscreen Your vehicle will return to the default state after a key cycle NOTE If your 4 digit PIN is lost or forgotten the vehicle will exit Valet Mode after a battery disconnect for ap proximately one minute Reconnect the battery and cycle the ignition to the RUN position the vehicle will be in Default Mode UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 ECO Mode If Equipped With Automatic performance Increased engine exhaust noise and or Transmission vibration may be noticed while Eco is active This is ERMOTA HOA 1 31 normal and a result of the increased amount of operating Track Sport C Defaut conditions where the vehicle is allowed to operate in four cylinder shutoff mode 6 4L Only The Paddle Shifters will be disabled while in Eco mode Power e 500 Transmission amp Eco Paddle Shift Off e Changing the Drive Mode will deactivate Eco Traction Street Suspension Streety e Eco will be disabled when another Drive Mode is Custom Set Up selected or Eco button is pressed GN J TA UCONNECT RADIOS IF EQUIPPED Radio Media Controls s Na Phone For detailed information about your Uconnect radio refer to
163. O KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 When the SAB deploys it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback s trim cover The inflating SAB de ploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag WARNING Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury 2 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABICs Located above the side windows The trim covering the SABICs is labeled SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Label Location SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts and or vehicle rollover events in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The SABICs deploy downward covering the side win WARNING sid dows An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the WARNING trim out of the way and covers the window The SABICs e Your vehicle is equipped wit
164. PMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Premium System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components Receiver module Four TPM sensors Various TPMS messages which display in the Driver Information Display DID and TPM Telltale Light STARTING AND OPERATING 445 0558045857 TPMS Display Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings i The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the Drivers Information Display DID will display a LOW TIRE message and a graphic 446 STARTING AND OPERATING Se showing the pressure values of each tire
165. PMS pressures and alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the warning have been established for the tire size TPMS from functioning properly Always check the equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tion or sensor damage may result when using re tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the placement equipment that is not of the same size replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause to continue to function properly sensor damage Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS sensor to become inoperable After using an after market tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Sx Anti Lock Brake ABS Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Anti Lock Brake ABS Indicator Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the igni tion switch is placed in the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving then the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on I
166. RTING YOUR VEHICLE es turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Unlatch The Trunk Push the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off push and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is activated the turn signals will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH 24 km h or greater NOTE The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition in the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE START
167. SC are in a reduced mode Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC cor rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel s to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition En gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appro priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition ee STARTING AND OPERATING 413 Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING Electronic Sta
168. T reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline es STARTING AND OPERATING 451 Materials Added To Fuel Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating gasolines that contain detergents corrosion and stability additives are recommended Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel economy reduce emissions and maintain vehicle perfor mance Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline con tains a higher level of detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel system deposits When avail able the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recom mended Visit www toptiergas com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perf
169. TENANCE SCHEDULES 559 000 08 8 ooo osz 000 3 0000 2 x 000861 8 000962 N ooozeL o00 0zz x 000921 amp 000912 e 000 021 amp 000902 x 000 00061 000801 8 00098 ooo zor S 00091 000 96 000091 x 000 06 ooo ost 000 8 2 00096 00087 00096 00027 amp 00001 00099 00004 00009 000 0 0009 000 06 0008 9 00008 002 S 000 07 00096 9 00009 00006 00005 000 2 2 00006 0008 9 00006 00021 amp 00002 0009 000 M 2 8 5 55559 29 So f7508 Sool e 21 8 2 6 28929588 StcsLsoolfseac 560 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Ses ooo ost 8 ooo osz 000 3 0000 000861 8 000962 N 00261 o00 0zz ooo 9zt amp 000012 e ooo ozt amp o00 00z 000 00061 000801 00098 ooo zor S 00091 00096 000091 0006 2 000 0 000 8 2 00096 00087 00096 ooo zz Q ooo ozt 00099 00004 00009 000 0 ooo rs 000 06 ooo sr 9 oo0 08 o00 zv amp 000 07 00096 9 00009 00006 00005 000 2 amp 00006 0008 9 00006 ooo zt 0
170. Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has Pressure not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a minimum of three hours Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals STARTING AND OPERATING 425 Term Definition Maximum Inflation The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation Pressure pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the side wall Recommended Cold Tire Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on Inflation Pressure the tire placard Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading ca pacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures 426 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door J 7 054901778 Example Tire Placard Location Door STARTING AND OPERATING 427 Tire And Loading Information Placard
171. The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Using Fob With Integrated Key Tip Start NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly place the ignition in the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage auto matically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs place the ignition in the LOCK OFF position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the ENGINE START STOP button is
172. The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance If the tire pressure is 19 psi 1 3 Bar or higher 1 Push the Power Button 4 to turn on Tire Service Kit and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver side door opening NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated push the Defla tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing 2 Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet 3 Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle 4 Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire service center WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 475 5 Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument 3 Push the Sealant Bottle release button The Sealant panel after the tire has been repaired Replace the Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos sible Refer to F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace ment NOTE When having the tire serviced advise the autho rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the Tire Service Kit F Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement 1 2 Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 clear in color Locate the round Sealant Bottle rel
173. To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as once a month The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range Adding 1 0 quart 95 liters of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499 NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter vals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute API categories of SN The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W 40 engine or equivalent MOPAR oil meeting the FCA US Material Standard MS 12633 for use in all operating
174. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine NOTE For vehicles with automatic transmission Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph 8 km h or less Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than 2 seconds you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 481 NOTE Press the ESC Off switch to place the Electronic Stability Control ESC system in Partial Off mode WARNING before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener Control in Starting And Operating for further infor ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or mation Once the vehicle has been freed press the ESC even failure of the axle and tires A tire could Off switch again to restore ESC On mode explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for CAUTION longer than 30 seconds continuously
175. VEHICLE ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control ACC utilizes a radar sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you NOTE e If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you ACC will maintain a fixed set speed If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration not to exceed the original set speed automatically to maintain a preset following distance while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead e The Cruise Control system has two control modes Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles Normal fixed speed cruise control mode is for cruis ing at a constant preset speed For additional informa tion refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section NOTE The normal fixed speed cruise control will not react to preceding vehicles Always be aware of the mode selected You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons The two control modes function differently Always confirm which mode is selected WARNING Adaptive Cruise Control ACC is a convenience system It is not a substitute for active driving involvement It is always the driver s responsibility Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 WARNING Continued to be attentive of
176. WARNING Continued WARNING Continued A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the automatic trans mission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the transmission gear selector Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an Continued authorized dealer immediately ee STARTING AND OPERATING 405 BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equi
177. WINDOWS 38 Power 5 38 AUTO Down Feature If Equipped 39 B TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE 40 E TRUNK SAFETY 41 Trunk Emergency Release 42 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 42 Important Safety Precautions 42 Seat Belt Systems 44 Supplemental Restraint System SRS 55 Child Restraints 71 Transporting Pets 90 SRT ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS 90 SAFETY TIPS sac eins edad 92 Transporting 92 Exhaust 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Vehicle is aeter rede tal sod cs 94 Outside The Vehicle 96 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Keyless Push Button Ignition Keyless Push Button Ignition This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitte
178. YOUR VEHICLE 109 WARNING ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road Some Uconnect Access services including 9 1 1 and Assist will NOT work without an operable 1X voice data or 3G data network connection NOTE e Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber Never place anything on or near the vehicle s 1X voice data or 3G data and GPS antennas You could prevent 1X voice data or 3G data and GPS signal reception which can prevent your vehicle from plac ing an emergency call An operable 1X voice data or 3G data network connection and a GPS signal is required for the 9 1 1 Call system to function properly General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Opera tion is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center
179. a sensor problem causing the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message to be displayed in the Driver Information Display DID 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION WARNING ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to Drivers must be careful when backing up even when recognize every obstacle including small obstacles using the Rear Park Assist system Always check Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to check detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must con tinue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF ParkSense EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever gear selector is put into REVERSE The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate The i
180. activated the Blind ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deactivated To change the Blind Spot Alert status press the Off Lights or Lights amp Chime button on the touchscreen NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire sur roundings across the top of the screen After five sec onds this note will disappear To make your selection press the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting had been selected ParkView Backup Camera Delay When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with cam
181. actual oil pressure Gauges 2 250 E Performance Pages 63 out a Vodes Aa Home Timers w Gauges 1 EN ee o Gouges dum Dr n a G Force Battery Voltage intake Air Temp Engine pu 7 d EH a Media NC b Apps Climate Phone 0455080384 Radio Controls SRT Performance Pages Gauges 2 6 4L Manual Transmission 1 15 63 out Performance Pages e a Vcn Home Timers Gouges 1 Gouges intake Air Temp G Force Battery Voltage Engine 33 GAD Radio af D Climate 2 Phone 0455080385 Media Controis Apps SRT Performance Pages Gauges 2 6 4L Automatic Transmission When selected this screen displays the following values e Battery Voltage Shows the actual battery voltage es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 Intake Air Temperature When selected this screen displays the following values Shows the actual intake air temperature Boost Pressure Transmission Temperature Automatic Transmission Shows the current value for boost pressure Only e Air Fuel Ratio Shows the current value for the air fuel ratio EB t FM 97 1 HD1 1315 E 63 out Performance Poses Inter Cooler IIC Coolant Temperature Shows the actual transmission temperature dan Shows the current value for the I C coolant temperature Timers Intake Air Temperature Gouges anap Q Pressure B Gouges E N
182. again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph 9 km h ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches 30 cm up to 79 inches 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orientation of the obstacle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the Driver Information Display DID It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected obstacle Refer to Driver Information Display DID in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information ParkSense Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle s distance and location relative to the vehicle If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region the display will show a single solid arc in the center
183. amp 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or Equipped equivalent Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or per formance of your transmission Hydraulic Power Steering Reser We recommend you use MOPAR Hydraulic System Power Steering Fluid voir If Equipped or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS 10838 Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Rear Axle We recommend you use MOPAR LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 API GL 5 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS B MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 554 Maintenance Chart 556 554 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance The message Oil Change Required will be displayed in the DID and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil cha
184. arahe gasoline having a posted octane number of 91 as specified by the 2 method The use of 91 or higher octane Premium gasoline is required in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATIO While operating on gasoline with the required octane number hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern However if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound see your dealer imme diately Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended octane number can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee STARTING AND OPERATING 449 Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before consid ering service for the vehicle Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended Prop erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im proved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as ethanol CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso line containing more t
185. ard Adjustment The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seat near the floor Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once the seat is in the desired position Using body pressure move forward and rear ward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Manual Front Seatback Recline To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat lean back to the desired position and release the lever To return the seatback lift the lever lean forward and release the lever Recline Lever WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Passenger Seat Easy Entry On the passenger seat pull forward on the lever located on the side of the seatback in order to dump the seatback and slide the seat forward You can also temporarily remove the seat belt from the guide loop on the seat and allow the seat belt to retract out of the way T
186. arranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M WARNING Engine exhaust internal combustion engines only some of its constituents and certain vehicle compo nents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of compo nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 573 MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washingion D C If you believe
187. as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended 550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Intercooler Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 Engine Oil For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operat ing conditions the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W 40 or equivalent MOPAR engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA US Mate rial Standard MS 12633 for use in all operating temperatures Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Fuel Selection 91 Octane or higher 0 15 Ethanol MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551 Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Manual Transmission If We recommend you use MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Equipped Automatic Transmission If Use only MOPAR ZF 8
188. ated inside the rear bumper fascia to detect highway licensable vehicles automobiles trucks motorcycles etc that enter the blind spot zones from the rear front side of the vehicle Rear Detection Zones When the vehicle is started the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Automatic Transmission Vehicles The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK Manual Transmission Vehicles The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any gear and enters stand by mode when the Park Brake is engaged the vehicle is not in REVERSE and the vehicle is stationary 030440174 BSM Warning Light The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft or 3 8 m The zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 10 ft 3 m beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph 10 km h or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas NOTE e The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de
189. ated turn within a pro grammed route To make your selection press the Navi gation Turn By Turn In Cluster button on the touch screen until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Units After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen you may select each unit of measure independently displayed in the Driver Information Display DID and navigation system if equipped The following selectable units of measure are listed below e Speed Select from MPH or km h e Distance Select from mi or km e Fuel Consumption Select from MPG US MPG UK L 100 km or km L e Pressure Select from psi kPa or bar Temperature Select from C or F e Power Select from HP US HP UK and kW e Torque Select from lb ft or Nm 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Voice After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available Voice Response Length When in this display you may change the Voice Re sponse Length settings To change the Voice Response Length press the Brief or Detailed button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected e Show Command List When in this display you may change the Show Command List settings To change the
190. ately 10 seconds as the system charges Front Rear Side Marker Lamp The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not serviceable separately The Side Markers must be replaced as an assembly see your authorized dealer Tail Turn And Stop Lamp The Tail Turn and Stop Lamps use LED lamps that are not serviceable separately The Tail Turn and Stop Lamps must be replaced as an assembly see your autho rized dealer Center Tail Backup Lamp The Center Tail Backup Lamp use LED lamps that are not serviceable separately The Center Tail Backup Lamp must be replaced as an assembly see your authorized dealer Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable separately The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly see your authorized dealer License Lamp The License Lamp use LED lamps that are not serviceable separately The License Lamp must be replaced as an assembly see your authorized dealer MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547 FLUID CAPACITIES Fluid Capacities 6 2L U S Metric Fuel Approximate 91 Octane or higher 0 15 Ethanol 18 5 Gallons 70 Liters Engine Oil With Filter SAE 0W 40 Synthetic API Certified 6 Quarts 5 68 Liters Cooling System Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant OAT coolant con 15 Quarts 14 4 Liters forming to MS 90032 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Intercooler MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant OAT coolant c
191. ater caution e After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CUPHOLDERS Front Cupholders The front cupholders are located in the center console and in the door panels Door Cupholder Front Cupholders UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 Rear Cupholders The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side by side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant s el bows Rear Cupholders 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE STORAGE Glove Compartment The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel Opened Glove Compartment Glove Compartment UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 Console Storage p a The center console has a storage compartment located underneath the armrest The compartment contains a 12 Volt power outlet and a molded
192. aused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529 Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet so
193. aust system may be equipped with an Electronic Exhaust Valve EEV system if the exhaust system is replaced with aftermarket products a Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL may be illuminated Cooling System WARNING When working near the radiator cooling fan discon nect the fan motor lead or place the ignition in the LOCK position OFF position for Keyless Enter N Go The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position RUN position for Keyless Enter N Go Continued MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513 WARNING Continued You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant conforming to 5 90032 by an authorized dealer Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle and or the super charger coolant reco
194. avity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 29 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module LA LD Police Electronic Shift Module LA 30 Fuse Spare 31 D 25 Amp Clear Engine Module 32 Fuse Spare 33 Fuse Spare 34 25 Amp Clear Powertrain 1 35 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain 2 36 10 Amp Red Anti Lock Brake Module 37 10 Amp Red Engine Controller Rad Fan Relays LD LX Electric Power Steering Module LD LX Fuel Pump Relay LD LX 5 Speed 38 10 Airbag Module MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 39 10 Amp Red EPS LA EHPS Police AC Clutch Relay Vacuum Pump Relay Fuel Pump Relay LA Rad Fan Relays LA 48 10 Amp Red AWD Module LD LX Front Axle Disconnect LD LX Adaptive Cruise LA If Equipped 49 Fuse Spare 50 Fuse Spare 51 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump 52 5 Amp Tan Adaptive Cruise LD LX If Equipped 53 Fuse Spare 536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Rear Power Distribution Center Fuses CAUTION There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel This center contains fuses and relays When installing the power distribution center cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and p
195. ay DID this indicates the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service Refer to Driver Information Display DID in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Even if the power steering assistance is no longer operational it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort especially at low speeds and during parking maneuvers If the condition persists see your authorized dealer for service POWER STEERING 6 2L SUPERCHARGED ENGINE The hydraulic power steering system is sport tuned and will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost ee STARTING AND OPERATING 401 If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and i
196. ay not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling In the illustration shown ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it s too late for the ACC system to take action ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane There may not be sufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle Always be atten tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary 032400173 Lane Changing Example 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead RA AL 032400174 Narrow Vehicle Example Stationary Objects And Vehicles ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles For example ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 General Information This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission FCC rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS GEN 210 220 310 Operation
197. be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK Doors closed Hood closed e Hazard switch off Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pushed Battery at an acceptable charge level 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee PANIC button not pushed e System not disabled from previous remote start event e Vehicle security alarm not active Ignition in Off position Keyless Enter N Go WARNING Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in jury or death when inhaled e Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death Remote Start Abort Message The following messages will display in the instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar Remote Start Aborted Trunk Ajar Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low e Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle To Reset The instrument cluster message stays active until the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position To Enter Remote Start Mode Push and release the REMOTE START button the transmitter twice within five
198. been selected e Auto Dim High Beams If Equipped When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will activate deactivate automatically under certain con ditions To make your selection press the Auto High Beams button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting has been selected Refer to Lights If Equipped in Un derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Daytime Running Lights If Equipped When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running To make your selection press the Daytime Running Lights button on the touch screen until a check mark appears next to setting indi cating that the setting has been selected 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e Flash Lights With Lock When this feature is selected the hazard lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or when using the passive entry feature This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press the Flash Lights with Lock button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting has been selected Doors amp Locks After pressing the Doors amp Locks button on the touch screen the following settings will be available e Auto Unlock
199. bility Control ESC cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap propriate driver input for the conditions Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Continued 414 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Continued e Vehicle modifications or failure to properly main tain your vehicle may change the handling charac teristics of your vehicle and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system Changes to the steering system suspension braking system tire type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance Improperly inflated and un evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor mance Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death ESC Operating Modes NOTE Depending upon model and mode of operation the ESC system may have multiple operatin
200. cati n a eg oe eR oe Fae EE Y Belts Seat saca eee e E Ya ead Body Mechanism Lubrication B Pillar Location esere resa ERR Rs Brake Assist System Brake Control System Electronic 405 500 INDEX eee Brake Fluid sesa san dae mE RR Red 549 551 Brake Parking ROT ea 402 Brakes isse d a eb n 405 Brake System a RR RR RR 405 519 Fluid Cheek ee ees 519 549 551 Master Cylinder i issues dere rr 519 Parking soip 224 Aft ad oda Leda SETS EROR ed 402 Warning 229 405 Brake Transmission 374 Braking ava ee E a 262 bic ek et 262 Braking 262 ORD eae ate tae oe eee Oe ere bere rat 262 Brightness Interior 4 5 144 Bulb 542 544 Bulbs Light ped 96 542 Cam ra Reate re RE 192 Capacities Fluid 440 we aes 547 548 Caps Filler dnte a s ue bebe 453 Engin xa edad e Eben RE P Rae entrei 499 Radiator Coolant Pressure 516 Carbon Monoxide Warning 92 452 Cargo Vehicle Loading 455 Car Washes sre retes erdot rra Rb eO RE 524 Center High Mounted Stop Light
201. ccupants Follow the re installation instructions above prior to oper ating the vehicle or occupying a seat Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or por table DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death Folding Rear Seatback Loop 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper sta bility for child seats and or passengers An improp erly latched seat could cause serious injury e The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should Folded Rear Seat be seated and using the proper restraint system When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Move to the outside of the vehicle the safety catch is Two latches must be released to open the hood located under the center front edge of the hood 1 Pull the hood releas
202. ce antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile device operation when not using Uconnect if equipped Regulatory And Safety Information USA CANADA Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits Nevertheless the wireless radio will be used in such a manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human body The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recom mendations which reflect the consensus of the scientific community The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers The level of energy UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emit ted by wireless devices such as mobile phones However the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or environments such as aboard airplanes If you are unsure of restrictions you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license exempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device ma
203. ce to mitigate roll back while towing a trailer WARNING e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so there may not be enough brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released In order to avoid rolling down an Continued STARTING AND OPERATING 411 WARNING Continued incline while resuming acceleration manually ac tivate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal e HSA is not a parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK e Failure to follow these warnings can result a collision or serious personal injury Disabling And Enabling HSA This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows For vehicles equipped with the Driver Information Display DID refer to Driver Information Display DID in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information For vehicles not equipped with the DID perform the following steps 1 A C N Center the steering wheel front wheels pointing straight forward Shift the tran
204. creen Setup 2 Upper Right Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until e Compass the Screen Setup Menu displays in the DID Push and Outside Temp default release the OK button to enter the submenus The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed e Time Range to Empty e Average L 100km or MPG e Current L 100km or MPG 1 U Left pper Trip A Distance Compass Outside Temp NOE Distance Time Range to Empty default 3 Center e Average L 100km or MPG Menu Title default e Current L 100km or MPG Compass Outside Temp e Time Range to Empty Average L 100km or MPG e Current L 100km or MPG e Trip A Distance e Trip B Distance e Audio Inform Digital Speed None Current Gear Off default Odometer Show default e Hide 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 6 Fuel Gauge e Standard default Detailed Defaults e Ok e Cancel Diagnostics If Equipped Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the diagnostic Menu is selected Then the Driver is able to view engine and emission vehicle faults Push OK to have the most recent fault code sent There is a delay when the next diagnostic code is requested during which the following message is displayed Checking System for Diagnostic Cod
205. cturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants A C Air Filter The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle next to the windshield wipers When installing a new filter ensure its proper orientation 1 Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507 072610690 T Access Door Filter Access Cover 2 Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover 3 Remove the used filter 4 Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow which is toward the rear of the vehicle text and arrows on the filter will indicate this 508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 072610693 A C Air Filter 5 Close the filter access cover Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate decklid sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubr
206. current ACC system settings The DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster The information it displays depends on ACC system status Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC ON OFF button located on the steering wheel until one of the following displays in the DID Adaptive Cruise Control Off When ACC is deactivated the display will read Adap tive Cruise Control Off Adaptive Cruise Control Ready When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Ready Push the SET or the SET button located on the steering wheel and the following will display in the DID ACC SET When ACC is set the set speed will display in the instrument cluster The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity occurs which may include any of the following e System Cancel e Driver Override System Off e ACC Proximity Warning ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 e ACC Unavailable Warning e The DID will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity Display Warnings And Maintenance Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle Warning The ACC FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance This most often occurs at times of poor visibility such as in snow or heavy rain The AC
207. d mph e Pushing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control ACC increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways However it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions Electronic Speed Control function performs differently Please refer to the proper section within this chapter 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR
208. d snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information STARTING AND OPERATING 437 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near 5 a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators 055007576 Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire Tire Tread These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1 16 of an inch 1 6 mm When the tread is 438 STARTING AND OPERATING Se worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Refer to Replacement Tires in this section for further information Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to Driving style Tire pressure Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnor
209. d Warning flashers 2 Verify that the valve stem on the wheel with the deflated tire is in a position that is near to the ground This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses 6 and 7 to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding Place the transmission in PARK auto transmission or in Gear manual transmission and place the ignition in the OFF position 4 Set the parking brake B Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit 1 Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to the Sealant Mode position Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 471 4 Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 onto the valve stem 5 Uncoil the Power Plug 8 and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet NOTE Do not remove foreign objects e g screws or nails from the tire C Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire Service Kit NOTE Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking b
210. d end of the overhead console are two courtesy reading lights Press the lens to turn on the light Press it a second time to turn off the light 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE These lights also turn on when a door is opened when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compartment access is a push push design Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open Push on the raised bar to close GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motor ized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicle s battery The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead console designate the three different HomeLink channels The HomeLink indicator is located on the left side of the first button HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming For more efficient programming and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequ
211. d whether deployment is appropriate A slower developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle A ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 faster developing event may deploy the seat belt preten sioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the vehicle The rollover sensing system may also deploy the seat belt pretensioners with or without the Side Air Bags on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a near rollover event If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to fric tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air
212. d with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will display in the DID for five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you place the ignition in the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily push and release the OK button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Without pushing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button and place the ignition to the ON RUN position do not start the engine 2 Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Without pushing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Secondary Method Of Navigating To The Oil Life Screen In The DID And Holding OK Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will dis
213. data unless the driver has cleared it via hold to Reset e Pushing OK will start current timer from 0 00 0 When OK is pushed the times are updated accord ingly e As soon as the driver exits the Lap Timer pages the current timer will stop and the time will be reset to 0 00 00 If the driver stays on the Lap Timer pages the cur rent timer will reset to 0 00 0 when ignition is placed in the off position or ignition placed in the ON position or will roll over at 59 59 99 if ever possible 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e Each time the driver pushes OK for a Lap that current time populates the Last time and also populates the 1st top space on the Timer History page the current time resets to 0 00 0 at every push of the OK button e The timer will stop when the driver navigates away from this page Lap History When selected this screen displays the Lap History and will color highlight the time that is the best time from the Timer Page Each time the driver pushes the OK button while on the Lap Timer page the current Lap Time populates the 1st spot and the rest of the data shifts down e Color will indicate the time that is the best time from the Timer Page Holding the OK button only resets the page you are on Lap History page is a static display of lap times only Top Speed When selected this screen displays the Top Speed since last reset Populates a top sp
214. ddi tives Engine Oil Change Requirements 6 2L Supercharged Engine If Equipped We recommend having your oil changed and vehicle serviced by your authorized dealer You should only perform maintenance procedures and or repairs for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment Your 6 2L Supercharged engine if equipped has a unique engine oil system The system contains a drain in the engine oil pan and the engine oil cooler It is neces sary for the service technician to drain both the engine oil pan and the engine oil cooler to properly perform the engine oil change procedure Failure to drain the engine oil cooler will result in overfilling your vehicle s engine oil system NOTE Do not overfill crankcase with engine oil pres sure loss or oil foaming can result ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501 To access these oil drains the vehicle needs to be safely lifted and supported to remove the front underbody shields belly pan Your service technician will refer to the Service Manual for proper under body shield belly pan removal and installation procedures Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself WARNING You can be badly injured working on or ar
215. detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 409 unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The Brake Assist System BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions BAS cannot prevent collisions in cluding those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on an incline If the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires the system will release brake pressur
216. djust the amount of airflow from these outlets e Bi Level Mode 27 Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demis ter outlets NOTE BI LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets Mix Mode We Air comes from the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 12 Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON OFF 13 Driver Temperature Control Down Button Uconnect 8 4 Only Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera ture settings or on the touchscreen press and slide the temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 14 Driver Temperature Control Up Button Uconnect 8 4 Only Provides the driver with independent temperature control Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen press and
217. dly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed Maintenance Schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center Continued 498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter vals Do not use chemical flushes in these compo nents as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air conditioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level
218. during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS 16D492 126 AA 2015 FCA US LLC All Rights Reserved Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC Ii First Edition Printed in U S A
219. dy when vehicle is traveling at greater than 30 MPH 48 km h 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Gauges 1 1 15 E 63 ou Performance Pages 1 15 63 ou Performance Pages Home Timers Timers Gouges 1 Gouges Gouges G Force Gauges 2 G Force Engine Engine Oil Pressure 4 9 0455080382 ia ZEA 7T f Media Controls s Phone 1 OFF 4 Sy Media Controls Apps Climate Nav Phone Merens SRT Performance Pages Gauges 1 6 2L Automatic SRT Performance Pages Gauges 1 6 2L Manual Transmission Transmission UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 When selected this screen displays the following values Coolant Temperature Shows the actual coolant temperature Oil Pressure Shows the actual oil pressure Oil Temperature Shows the actual oil temperature Battery Voltage Shows the actual battery voltage Trans Oil Temp Auto Transmission Only Shows the actual automatic transmission oil temperature 1 15 Performance Pages G Force Engine p KAP PY Al Media Apps Controls Climate SRT Performance Pages Gauges 1 6 4L When selected this screen displays the following values Coolant Temperature Shows the actual coolant temperature Oil Temperature Shows the actual oil temperature 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss e Oil Pressure Shows the
220. e Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition Continued Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you 512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions NOTE Your vehicles exh
221. e ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the customer has elected to have the Electronic em Stability Control ESC in a reduced mode 418 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers it cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles NOTE ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in Full Off mode if equipped Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section for a complete explanation of the available ESC modes WARNING Many factors such as vehic
222. e ON RUN position The fuel pump symbol points to 2 Driver Information Display DID Display theduel doors Incated When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Driver Information Display DID mes 5 Temperature Gauge sages Refer to Driver Information Display DID The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for fur perature Any reading within the normal range indi ther information cates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily 3 Speedometer peer 2 20 The gauge pointer will likely indicate higher tem perature when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range e Indicates vehicle speed 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats
223. e Button To Lock 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE e After pushing the door handle button you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using either Passive Entry door handle This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking The Passive Entry system will not operate if the transmitter battery is dead The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle s interior door panel WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door control both of the door windows 0218042167 Power Window Switches There is a single window control on the passenger s door trim panel that operates the window on the passenger s door The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or ACC position es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 NOTE e The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF This feature is cancelled when either front door is opened The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Uconnect Settings in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation The door window will lower slightly if it is closed completely when opening the door The window will return to its
224. e ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h It will provide an alert audible and or visual to indicate the proximity to other objects The system can be enabled with Sound Only or Sound and Display To change the ParkSense status press and release the Sound Only or Sound and Display button Refer to ParkSense in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for sys tem function and operating information Rear ParkSense Volume If Equipped The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be se lected from the DID or Uconnect System The chime volume settings include LOW MEDIUM and HIGH The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM To make your selection press the Rear ParkSense Vol button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting had been selected ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles e Blind Spot Alert If Equipped When this feature is selected the Blind Spot Alert feature Provides alerts visual and or audible to indicate objects in your blind spot The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode When this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors When Lights amp Chime mode is
225. e Seat Belt Pretensioners 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE e Seat Belt Buckle Switch e Seat Track Position Sensors Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG are embossed on 0226076425 the air bag covers Advanced Front Air Bags And Knee Impact Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolster ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 WARNING Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
226. e and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to activate e The feature must be enabled The vehicle must be stopped e Park brake must be off e Driver door must be closed The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear 410 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Continued e HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears The system will not activate if the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission if the clutch is pressed HSA will remain active WARNING There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist HSA will not activate and slight rolling may occur such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer HSA is not a substitute for active driving involvement It is al ways the driver s responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles people and objects and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions Your complete attention is always required while Continued driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury Towing With HSA HSA will also provide assistan
227. e hazard light button is pressed The hazard lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light button Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power Unlock the power door locks en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event the ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON RUN to ignition OFF Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine Air Bag Warning Light The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection in collision The Occupant Re N straint Controller ORC monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC position the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four t
228. e inflation pressure for this tire STARTING AND OPERATING 423 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 424 STARTING AND OPERATING EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 Tire
229. e lever located under the left side of the instrument panel 0313042085 Hood Safety Catch Location Hood Release Lever 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 3 Push the safety catch to the left Hood Safety Catch CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi mately 6 inches 15 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 LIGHTS Headlight Switch XE The headlight switch is located on the left side of 4 the instrument panel This switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instru ment panel lights instrument panel light dimming and interior lights Headlight Switch Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight parking light and instrument panel light operation 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns
230. e operating modify the air bag system for persons with dis abilities contact your authorized dealer Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was traveling E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and every Canadian province requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be pros
231. e retractor As the webbing retracts you will hear a clicking sound This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor If it is locked you should not be able to pull out any web bing If the retractor is not locked repeat step 5 Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se strap See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a tether anchor 9 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage WARNING Do not attach a tether strap for a rear facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat including the seat frame or a tether anchorage Only attach the Continued WARNING Continued tether strap of a rear facing car seat to the tether anch
232. e temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel If Engine Fails To Start could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergen cies for further information WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Continued 366 STARTING AND OPERATING Clearing A Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button Automatic Transmission Only If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel press and hold the brake pedal press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it then push and release the ENGINE START STOP button once The starter motor will engage automatically run for 10 seconds and then disenga
233. e the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Cruise Control ACC ON OFF button again At this ON OFF button The ACC menu in the DID displays time the system will turn off and the DID will display ACC Ready Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Off To Activate Deactivate 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Off 0323001263 Adaptive Cruise Control Off WARNING Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system on when not in use is dangerous You could acciden tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you Continued WARNING Continued want You could lose control and have a collision Always leave the system off when you are not using it To Set A Desired ACC Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the SET button or the SET button and release The DID will display the set speed If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h the Set Speed shall be the current speed of the vehicle Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal If you do not the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed If this occurs e The message DRIVER OVERRIDE will display in the DID ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 The system will not be controlling the distance be tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal To Cancel
234. e the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic e Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve hicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment Prepare A List Be Reasonable With Requests IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE FCA US LLC Customer Center FCA Canada Inc Customer Center In Mexico Contact Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY Service Contract WARRANTY INFORMATION MOPAR PARTS REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington In Canada 573 568 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS 574 Traction Grades s s scu exar 98 Seed ced 575 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM Temperature 576 TIRE QUALITY 575 Tread Wats iv ERES E BEES ewes 575 es F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 569 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you are having warranty work done be sur
235. e to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealer have the 570 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest informat
236. e transmission to fourth gear you can press the clutch in and shift to another forward gear Downshifting To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life down shift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep grade 372 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Skipping more than one gear while downshifting WARNING could cause you to lose control of your vehicle You could have a collision It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always shift the automatic transmission into PARK or the manual transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE apply If you skip more than one gear while downshifting or downshift at too high an engine speed you could damage the engine transmission or clutch Do not downshift into first gear when the vehicle is moving faster than 15 mph 24 km h as you could damage the engine and or clutch Continued WARNING Continued the parking bra
237. e your voice to search for the most popular places or things around you 1 Press the Apps button on the touchscreen 2 Press the Yelp button on the touchscreen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351 3 Once the YELP home screen appears on the touchscreen push the VR button then say YELP search 4 Listen to the system prompts and after the beep tell Uconnect the place or business that you d like Uconnect to find TIP Once you perform a search you can reorganize the results by selecting either the Best Match Rating or Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display t FM 87 7 12 35 yap gt Current Location Phone Yelp SiriusXM Travel Link 8 4A 8 4AN Need to find a gas station view local movie listings check a sports score or the 5 day weather forecast SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8 4AN system Not available for 8 4A system 352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Push the VR button After the beep say one of the following commands lt Travel Link Show fuel prices P dm Fuel Prices Movie Listings Show 5 day weather forecast 5 A G D e Show extended weather Weather My Favorites Subscription epe CSiriusxm A alerts are not accessible with Voice Com Mitt Die mand ax pa 2 JE b amp ti will NE Media Phone Manager Apps Settings
238. ear Park Assist System During vehicle start up when the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted condition the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message for five seconds Refer to Driver Information Display DID in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition the Driver Information Display DID will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN SORS appears in the Driver Information Display DID make sure the outer surface and the inside of the rear fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED appears in the DID see an authorized dealer Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR
239. ease button in the recessed area under the sealant bottle Bottle 1 will pop up Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit housing Position the new Sealant Bottle 1 in the housing so that the Sealant Hose 6 aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing Push the bottle into the housing An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 and return the hose to its storage area located on the bottom of the air pump Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the vehicle 476 WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES Se JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury Preparations For Jump Start The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the engine compartment for jump starting NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precaution
240. ecessary Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid reservoir apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers 510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal 4 1 of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Driver s Information Display DID WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician i
241. ed follow these steps EE 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code step 2 and follow all remaining steps Programming A Non Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995 1 Place the ignition in the ON RUN position 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Push and hold the Homelink button you want to program while you push and hold the hand held transmitter button Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Repr
242. ed DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature To change the Engine Off Power Delay setting press the Ed Hu or E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval and choose from 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes or 10 minutes Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status press the or button on the touch screen to select your desired time interval Audio After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available BalancelFade This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings Press and drag the speaker icon use the arrows to adjust or tap the C icon to readjust to the center Equalizer This feature allows you to adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the and buttons on the touchscreen NOTE Bass Mid Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly o
243. ed Detailed registration instructions can be found on the next page 346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se NOTE Uconnect Access is available only on equipped vehicles purchased within the continental United States Alaska and Hawaii Services can only be used where coverage is available see coverage map for details 9 1 1 Call A Security Alarm Notification f Remote Door Lock Unlock 2 Stolen Vehicle Assistance Remote Vehicle Start 25 Remote Horn and Lights Yelp Search Voice Texting 4a Roadside Assistance Call WiFi Hotspot Tf vehicle is equipped Extra charges apply Vehicle Health Alert Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key systems For further information go to the Mopar Owner Connect website moparownerconnect com Register 8 4A 8 4AN To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your vehicle you first need to register with Uconnect Access 1 Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror 0401020352 2 Press the Uconnect Care button on the touchscreen 3 A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your vehicle and handle all of the details UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347 Signing up is easy Simply follow the steps above Or press the Apps button on the touchscreen to Register By Web to complete the process using your smartphone or computer For further in
244. ed Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level MANUAL M The MANUAL M position beside the DRIVE position enables full manual control of transmission shifting also known as AutoStick mode refer to AutoStick in this section for further information Tog gling the shift lever forward or rearward while in the MANUAL AutoStick position will manually select the transmission gear and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as M1 M2 M3 etc Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission may operate only in certain gears or may not shift at all Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall In some situations the transmission may not re engage if the engine is turned off and restarted The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more serious conditions and indicate what actions may be necessary In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps STARTING AND OPERATING 381 NOTE In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates the transmission may not
245. ed at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position These anchorages are used to install LATCH equipped child seats without using the vehicle s seat belts Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages In these seating positions the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint Please see the following table for more information THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 022669138 e Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position Zi Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child restraint for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH sys tem once the combined weight is more than 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint No Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint Can two child restrain
246. eed from first drive cycle and every time that speed is exceeded that number is stored here unless until the driver resets the screen Latching over ignition cycles Units will change with the global change in units Driver Assist If Equipped Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu The DID displays the current ACC system settings The information displayed depends on ACC system status ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC ON OFF button located on the steering wheel until one of the following displays in the DID Adaptive Cruise Control Off When ACC is deactivated the display will read Adap tive Cruise Control Off Adaptive Cruise Control Ready When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Ready Push the SET or the SET button located on the steering wheel and the following will display in the DID ACC SET When ACC is set the set speed will display in the instrument cluster The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity occurs which may include any of the following e Distance Setting Change e System Cancel e Driver Override System Off e ACC Proximity Warning e ACC Unavailable Warning The DID will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC
247. eed towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer or a Check Gascap message will display in the Driver Information Display DID If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the Trip Odometer button to MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495 turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration C nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing
248. ehicle speed is greater than 3 mph 5 km h the reverse inhibitor activates to help prevent shifts into REVERSE When at a complete stop you may notice lighter shift efforts into REVERSE with the ignition switch in the ON position RUN position for Keyless Enter N Go as compared to the LOCK position OFF position for Keyless Enter N Go This is normal operation of the transmission reverse inhibitor system noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged clutch pedal released but it may also be heard when driving at low engine RPM Also this may be more noticeable when the transmis sion is warm This is a normal condition and is not an indication of a problem with your clutch or transmis sion Shifting Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the accelerator pedal before shifting gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator pedal Damage to the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not fully press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator pedal when shifting 370 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss The six speed manual transmission has a spring that centers the shift lever near third and fourth gear This spring helps you know which gear you are in when you are shifting Be careful when shifting from first to second or downshifting from sixth to fifth The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and fourth gear Make sure you move the shift lever i
249. elf is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes Occupants including children who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed Occupants including children should never lean on or sleep against the door side windows or area where the Side Air Bags inflate even if they are in an infant or child restraint Seat belts and child restraints where appropriate are necessary for your protection in all collisions They also help keep you in position away from inflating Side Air Bags To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child WARNING e Side Air Bags need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you Continued 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued properly I
250. elt even though you have air bags In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Continued THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of the seat belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Continued WARNING Continued Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision The seat belt forces won t be at the strong hi
251. eltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat if equipped in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho rized dealer FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti vating BeltAlert NOTE If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger if equipped with out board front passenger seat BeltAlert is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoul der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle WARNING e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat b
252. ency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes NOTE e Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at HomeLink com for information or assistance Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 1995 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button 1 Place the ignition in the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while
253. enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph 48 km h side of the vehicle Side Monitoring Rear Monitoring 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Overtaking Traffic If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed of less than 10 mph 16 km h and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1 5 seconds the warning light will be illuminated If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph 16 km h the warning light will not illuminate Overtaking Approaching UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are stationary objects such as guardrails posts walls foliage traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in berms etc However occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes on such objects This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service Stationary Objects Overtaking Passing 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians bicy Opposing Traffic 0304052894 clists or animals Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system always check your vehicle s mirrors glance over your shoulder and use your tur
254. er operation or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation CAUTION Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the wind shield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than off Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multifunc tion lever to the first detent position and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are four delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km h or less ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 Mist Feature Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction lever NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid Windshield Washers To use the washer push the multifunction lever inward toward the stee
255. er N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten Power Sunroof Switch your seat belt properly and make sure all passen gers are also properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result WARNING e Never leave children unattended in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Never leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location Continued 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Opening Sunroof Express Push the switch rearward and release it within one half second The sunroof and sunshade will open automati cally from any position The sunroof and sunshade will open fully and stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof push and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition unt
256. er ignition shut down e FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects ground reflections objects not in the path of the car stationary objects that are far away oncoming traffic or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed e FCW will be disabled like ACC with the unavailable screens 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Service FCW Warning If the system turns off and the DID displays e ACC FCW Unavailable Service Required Cruise FCW Unavailable Service Required This indicates there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have the system checked by an authorized dealer PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions in this section for limitations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph 11 km h or above The system will become active
257. era delay turned OFF the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned ON the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph 12 km h the transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF position To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Controls button on the touchscreen the settings button on the touchscreen then the Safety amp Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen Press the Parkview Backup Camera Delay button on the touch screen to turn the ParkView Delay ON or OFF Rain Sensing Auto Wipers When this feature is selected and the wipers are on the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection press the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting had been selected Hill Start Assist If Equipped When this feature is selected the Hill Start Assist HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating information To make your selection press the Hill Start Assist b
258. erate under the following conditions Low Ambient Temperature When the ignition is first turned ON the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside tem perature is greater than 32 F 09 e Transmission In NEUTRAL Position When the ignition is ON and the transmission is in the NEU TRAL position the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph 5 km h or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position NOTE Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MANUAL TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column 0317073645 Tilt Telescoping Control Handle To unlock the steering column pull the lever downward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the lever upward until fully e
259. ert is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON RUN ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert Warning Sequence The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un buckled if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled The driver should instruct all occu pants to buckle their seat belts Change Of Status If the driver or outboard front seat passenger if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied B
260. es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 e Driver must push the OK button again to see the next Pcode otherwise current message remains displayed e Driver exits when they cycle to another submenu up or down e Faults are displayed from newest to the oldest e If the menu is exited before the end of codes is reached when the driver re enters the list will be restarted from the beginning When no codes are present or the last code is reached TAC 2 P0000 and this message is displayed ral aw wan a u Uconnect 8 4A 8 4AN Buttons On Touchscreen And e No Further or End of Diagnostic Codes Buttons On Faceplate UCONNECT SETTINGS 1 Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Buttons On The Faceplate Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel In addition there is a Scroll Enter control knob located on the right side Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings i e 30 60 90 push the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting i e ON OFF Your Uconnect system may also ha
261. ess the Track button on the touchscreen to provide the fastest shift speeds and will have the highest comfort trade off Sport Press the Sport button on the touchscreen to provide faster shift speeds and will have a moderate comfort trade off e Street Press the Street button on the touchscreen to provide a balance of shift speed and comfort for typical daily driving UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 Paddle Shifters e OFF NL NNNM Les the OFF button on the touchscreen to disable gm ale Sifters steering wheel paddle shifters ON Enable steering wheel fon paddle shifters Traction OFF Disable steering wheel paddle shifters Traction un K Minimal traction c control minimal stability control SPORT Reduced traction x3 To Za L control reduced stability A 2 UMP CoO Radio Media Controls Apps Climate Phone 0455080400 control STREET Full traction control full stability control Paddle Shifters e ON Phone Press the ON button on the touchscreen to enable steering wheel paddle shifters Traction 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Track Suspension Press the Track button on the touchscreen to modify 01 34 traction control to optimize track performance with the E E Tee N least stability control TRACK Firmest possible suspension strongest comfort trade off Sport SPORT Firmer suspension Press the
262. etween the eight available gears To activate AutoStick move the shift lever into the MANUAL M position beside the DRIVE position The current transmission gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster along with a high lighted M Manual indication When the shift lever is in the MANUAL M position tap the shift lever forward or tap the shift paddle on the steering wheel to downshift the transmission to the next lower gear or tap the lever rearward or tap the shift paddle to command an upshift Paddle Shifters 1 Shift Paddle 2 4 Shift Paddle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 383 NOTE Tapping one of the steering wheel mounted shift paddles while the shift lever is in DRIVE will activate a temporary AutoStick mode Tapping to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear while using to enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear The current gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster but the M will not be highlighted The transmission will revert back to normal operation if the shift lever remains in DRIVE after a period of time depending on accelerator pedal activity In AutoStick mode the transmission will shift up or down when is manually selected by the driver using the shift lever or the shift paddles unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result It will remain in the selected gear until another u
263. ey Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION e Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer This procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys tem serviced bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency RF devices equipped in this vehicle This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence exempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
264. ey will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN from the OFF position NOTE The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the Dome defeat position extreme bottom position The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the Dome defeat position extreme bottom position 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk or activate the Panic Alarm from dis tances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit ter buttons for all RKE transmitters Key Fob With RKE Transmitter To Unlock The Doors Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 1st Press Of Key Fob U
265. f an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Seat Belt Systems Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Driver And Passenger BeltAlert If Equipped amp BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert to buckle their seat belts The Belt Alert feature is active when ever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position Initial Indication If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON RUN position an intermit tent chime will signal for a few seconds If the driver or outboard front seat passenger if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAl
266. f the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock Brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 Low Fuel Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Low Fuel Indicator Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added Adaptive Cruise Control Alert Indicator Light If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What It Means RI Adaptive Cruise Control Alert Indicator Light This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Forward Collision Indicator Light If Equipped Yellow Telltale What It Means Light y Forward Collision Indicator Light 422 This telltale will turn warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle front of you Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light V This light will illuminate when fuel filler cap is loose Properly close the filler cap to disen gage the light If the
267. f the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as Continued 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Continued required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at HomeLink com for safety infor mation or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not ex pressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci fications were met POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 WARNING Continued accessible to children Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Ent
268. finish Take care never to scratch the paint of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing open that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is CAUTION considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials cause that destroys the paint and protective coating such as steel wool or scouring powder that will have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The scratch metal and painted surfaces cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 the owner kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals 526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M f you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion
269. fluid leak occurs visit your autho rized dealer immediately Severe transmission dam age may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid And Filter Changes Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Routine fluid and filter changes are not required How ever change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated with water etc or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason Rear Axle Fluid Level Check Checking the fluid level while the vehicle is on level ground and has been stationary for 15 minutes will improve the accuracy of the fluid level reading Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the axle The fluid level should be 1 2 5 mm below the fill plug Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Change Axle Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals 524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other season
270. following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency RF devices equipped in this vehicle This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence exempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years e Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may reduce this range How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must
271. for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors and trunk for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed interior switches for door locks and decklid release are disabled If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the fol lowing audible and visible signals the horn will pulse the headlights will turn on park lamps and or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash Rearming Of The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the system will turn off the horn after approxi mately 29 seconds turn off all of the visual signals after 5 seconds and then the system will rearm itself up to 8 times To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm 1 Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the OFF position refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the key is physically removed from the ignition 2 Perform one of the following
272. for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle 434 STARTING AND OPERATING Se loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera Radial Ply Tires tion Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat WARNING ing speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the Tire Repair maximum capacity at continuous speeds above If your tire becomes damaged it may be repaired if it 75 mph 120 km h meets the following criteria
273. formation please visit www driveuconnect com Mobile App 8 4A 8 4AN You re only a few steps away from using remote com mands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle 348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 0307077996 Mobile App To link your internet radio accounts 1 Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile device 2 Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the bottom of the app 3 Press the app you d like to connect to your vehicle Enter your login information for the selected app and press Link Next time you re in your vehicle enable Bluetooth pair your phone and select the Via Mobile app you want to play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream your personalized music NOTE e You can also complete this process on the web Simply visit moparownerconnect com log in and click Set Up Via Mobile Profile under Quick Links Once you download the app to your compatible mobile device you will also be able to start your vehicle and lock unlock its doors from virtually any where es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349 Voice Texting 8 4A 8 4AN 1 To send a message push the Phone button amp e After the beep say the following command Send mes sage to John Smith 2 Listen to the prompt After the beep dictate the message you would like to send Wait for Uconnect to process your message 3 The Uconnect system will repeat your message
274. ft cloth or micro fiber towel A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp cloth 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly 530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING FUSES WARNING e When replacing a blown fuse always use an appro priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury fire and or property damage Before replacing a fuse make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent and or disengaged with the cupholder in the center console If the replaced fuse blows again contact an autho rized dealer If a general protection fuse for safety systems air bag system braking system power unit systems engine syste
275. g modes ESC On This is the normal operating mode for the ESC When ever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving conditions Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs Partial Off The Partial Off mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation which allows for more wheel spin than normally al lowed This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily push the ESC Off switch and the ESC Off Indicator Light will illuminate To turn the ESC on again momentarily push ee STARTING AND OPERATING 415 the ESC Off switch and the ESC Off Indicator Light NOTE will turn off For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a mo mentary button push will toggle the ESC mode Mul WARNUNG tiple momentary button pushed may be required to e When in Partial Off mode the TCS functionality return to ESC On of ESC except for the limited slip feature de Sport and ESC Track if equipped are ESC scribed in the TCS section has been disabled and partial off mode s EE the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated When in Partial Off mode the engine power Full Off If Equipped ni 2 d bed 2 i th This mode is intended f
276. g precau tions should be observed Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles e Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible e Keep tires properly inflated Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip Differential LSD that reduces but does not eliminate the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for im proved handling DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle CAUTION Due to lower ground clearance driving your ve hicle up steep driveways approach ramps or near parking blocks may cause damage to the front fascia and ground effects Driving through snow more than 4 inches 100 mm deep may cause damage to the front fascia and ground effects 398 STARTING AND OPERATING Flowing Rising Water WARNING WARNING Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flowing water can wear away the road or path s Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water
277. g this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe engine and or transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not cov ered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ENGINE COMPARTMENT 6 2L SUPERCHARGED 492 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 6 4L 392 HEMI 3 054564 ke pee ed 493 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II 494 Loose Fuel Filler Cap isse md 494 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ace cassia xpath ea X Rw n 495 REPLACEMENT 5 496 B DEALER SERVICE RR Dur 497 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 497 Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter Engine Air Cleaner Maintenance Free Battery Air Conditioner Maintenance Body Lubrication Windshield Wiper Blades Adding Washer Fluid Exhaust System Cooling System 490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Brake System cssc gom Se m ee 519 Clutch Hydraulic System Manual Transmission If Equipped 521 Manual Transmission If Equipped 521 Automatic Transmission If Equipped 521 Rear AXI 523 Appearance Care And Protection From COMOSION a iiec dort 524
278. ge Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Clearing A Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button Manual Transmission Only If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel press and hold the clutch pedal press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it then push and hold the ENGINE START STOP button for no more than 15 seconds Release the accelerator pedal and the clutch pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 367 WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that is located near the air box cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electr
279. gine 239 Map Reading 143 195 508 INDEX Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 145 249 Passing esse eee hk RE p e Re 142 Reading i253 SOR 143 195 Seat Belt Reminder 227 Security Alati i esce par c des 231 Service una Pa o RD S HR hee E EUR Rem 5 542 544 Tire Pressure Monitoring 5 243 442 Traction Control ET EIE de 416 Tum Signal 96 141 142 250 Vanity 112 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 232 250 Loading 455 457 Capacities cu dus segs Re Rea e ded 457 THES ueber d e REG E 426 LOCKS a y ER UR ERR BO ER RG he 30 Automatic 32 Auto Unlock s 33 DOOR ete aoe eres ERE Gree 30 en INDEX 559 Power Door sra iea e ate Pe Ea 32 Low Tire Pressure System 442 Lubrication 2222 224 508 Lug Nuts repa cs ende oce s 463 Maintenance Free 503 Maintenance Procedures 497 Maintenance 5 554 556 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 239 495 Manual Backward ee dive
280. gs To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Air Bag Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Air Bag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while o driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible This light will ry illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected it will stay on until the fault is cleared If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately Refer to Occupant Re straints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Brake Warning Light Red Telltale What It Means Light Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir i
281. h left and right inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned SABICs Do not stack luggage or other cargo up in the area where the SABICs inflate Children are at an high enough to block the deployment of the even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag SABICs The trim covering above the side win dows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstruc tions Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs In order for the SABICs to work as intended do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require perma nent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 The SABICs and SABs Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC de termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate based on the severity and type of collision Vehicle damage by its
282. han 1576 ethanol E 15 Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate Please observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15 ethanol E 15 450 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Problems that result from using gasoline containing more than 15 ethanol E 15 or gasoline containing methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non Flex Fuel Vehicles FFV are compatible with gaso line containing up to 1576 ethanol E 15 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim ited Warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms Operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on Poor engine performance Poor cold start and cold drivability Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion MMT In Gasoline Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MM
283. hance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions 406 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert Braking RAB and Rain Brake Support RBS Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD This function manages the distribution of the braking torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear axle This is done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle Brake System Warning Light The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the brake system is not functioning properly and that immediate service is required If the Brake System Warning Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light repaired as soon as possible Anti Lock Brake System ABS The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances vehicle control during braking The ABS performs a self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started and driven During this self check you may hear a sligh
284. he Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the on position and stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Redundant Air Bag Warning Light Maintaining Your Air Bag System If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is er detected which could affect the Supplemental N Restraint System SRS the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the in strument panel The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared In addition a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on upper right side of the instrument panel Do not intermittently or remains on while driving have an modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately For add aftermarket side steps or running boards additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to the Instrument Panel section of this manual Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need
285. he Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached Power Lumbar If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats are also equipped with power lumbar The power lumbar Power Lumbar Switch switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Front Heated Seats If Equipped The front
286. he passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature 10 Blower Control Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air Dm forced through the climate system There are seven blower speeds available Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen as follows Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Button On The Touchscreen Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons 11 Modes The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets and demist outlets The Mode settings are as follows Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individu ally adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or a
287. he pedals Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control Continued 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR WARNING Continued If required mounting posts must be properly in stalled if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for proper closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel e
288. heated seats control buttons are located within the Uconnect system You can gain access to the control buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen e Press the heated seat button 4 once to turn the HI setting ON e Press the heated seat button lj a second time to turn the LO setting ON e Press the heated seat button al a third time to turn the heating elements OFF ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 If the Hl level setting is selected the system will auto matically switch to LO level after approximately 60 min utes of continuous operation At that time the display will change from HI to LO indicating the change The LO level setting will turn OFF automatically after ap proximately 45 minutes NOTE The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the heated seats can be programed to come on during a remote start This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods
289. high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo spheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp Models with Halogen Headlamps If Equipped To replace the passenger side lamps 1 Open the hood 2 Remove the headlamp cover 3 Reach behind the passenger headlamp assembly NOTE The park turn lamps can also be accessed at this point 4 Turn the headlamp access cap counterclockwise to re move 5 Remove bulb by turning it counter clockwise and disconnect MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545 6 Install new bulb by turning it clockwise and reconnect 7 Reinstall headlamp access cap by turning it clockwise and then reinstall headlamp cover To replace the driver side lamps 1 Open the hood 2 Remove the air cleaner filter cover by removing three fasteners and loosening the clean air inlet clamp and then rotate cover off to the side NOTE The cover has an electrical connector that does not need to be disconnected
290. his allows for easier access to the rear seat To return the seat to a normal seating position first return the seatback to its original recline location and then slide the entire seat back to the pre set lock position Easy Entry Lever 0309081815 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision NOTE Do not reverse the head restraints making the rear of the head restraint face forward in an attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of your head Reactive Head Restraints Front Seats The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with Reactive Head Restraints RHR In the event of a rear impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants head and the RHR The RHRs will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact If the RHRs do not return to
291. icant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mecha nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509 Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use Poor perfor mance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as n
292. ifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK P This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may shift the trans mission into PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK As an added precau tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING e Never use the PARK position of an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 377 WARNING Continued Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK automatic transmission Check by trying to move the transmission gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released Make sure the automatic transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
293. ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE D This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris tics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain or traveling into strong head winds 380 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss use the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section for further information to select a lower gear Under these conditions using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup During extremely cold temperatures 22 F 30 C or below transmission operation may be modified depend ing on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle spe
294. il the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Push the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof push and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Venting Sunroof Express Push and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the s
295. ild or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode Continued 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the Key Fob from vehicle place the ignition in the OFF position and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses a Key Fob with a factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter a Keyless Push Button Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and
296. ime ET Gouges 1 0 100 ET 63 out 2 Current Last 1 8 ET 1 8 MPH 1 4 ET 1 4 MPH Gouges 2 Best G Force Brake Distance ft Brake from mph Engine Save Nav Phone 0455080379 Radio Media Controls SRT Performance Pages Timers When the Timers Page is selected you will be able to select from following Tickets e Current Pressing the Current button displays a real time summary of the performance timers e Last Pressing the Last button displays the last recorded run of performance timers e Best Pressing the Best button displays the best recorded run of performance timers except for braking data 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e Save Pressing the Save button will let you save the last run Any saved run over 10 will overwrite the last saved run for Uconnect System storage The operation of the Save feature is listed below 6 02 Performance Pages e a Modes Home Uss Timers Select location to save Current time trial ticket Gouges 1 5D Card Gouges Utonnect Cancel uf Media Apps V Nav Phone 0455080380 Controls Climate SRT Performance Pages Save e With a USB jump drive installed press the USB button to save runs to the jump drive e With an SD Card installed press the SD Card to save runs
297. ine 517 Door srta e e db aa ERR 237 Door Ajar Light 2 eR rae 237 Door Locks Door BoekS 4 22 444 Oh ha bt Rae Res 23 30 Key E ERE ERO 30 Remote 523323 oR ER ee E PES 30 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 30 Door Locks 32 Door Opener 196 Driver Information Display Bie sachs les bn 255 258 Instrument Cluster Display 255 258 Driving Through Flowing Rising Or Shallow Standing Waters a0 did Ma eek Rede a ex b RR Ses ER 397 Electrical Power 208 Electric Remote 111 Electronic Brake Control 405 Anti Lock Brake System 406 en INDEX 583 Electronic Roll Mitigation 418 Traction Control 412 Electronic Power Distribution Center 531 Electronic Speed Control Cruise 153 154 157 Electronic Stability Control 5 412 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 235 Emergency Deck Lid 42 Emergency In Case Of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 480 Hazard Warning Flasher 462 Jump Starting 0000 476 478 Overheating ee a ee die oe
298. ine Oil Fill 5 Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 6 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 0745065632 7 Engine Coolant Reservoir 8 Air Cleaner Filter 9 Power Steering Reservoir 10 Engine Oil Dipstick 11 Power Distribution Center Fuses 12 Washer Fluid Reservoir MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 6 4L 392 0745051665 1 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 6 Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 2 Remote Jump Start Negative Battery Post 7 Engine Coolant Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Dipstick 8 Air Cleaner Filter 4 Engine Oil Fill 9 Power Distribution Center Fuses 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Washer Fluid Reservoir 494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not n
299. ing System Re fer to Power Steering in Starting and Operating for further information Door Open Warning Light If Equipped Red Telltale Light Door Open Warning Light What It Means This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar open and not fully closed 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Trunk Open Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Trunk Open Warning Light cmm This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is open and not fully closed UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights Engine Check Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Engine Check Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Engine Check Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly LS Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor quality fuel etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through sev eral typical driving styles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing When the engine is ru
300. ing and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Safety and Vehicle Stability Economy e Tread Wear Continued e Ride Comfort 432 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Continued Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering NOTE Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Fuel Economy Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door At
301. ing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at a minimum of 50 OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519 the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodica
302. ings reset to default Clear Personal Data After pressing the Clear Personal Data Settings button on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail able e Clear Personal Data When this feature is selected it will remove personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets To remove personal information press the Clear Personal Data button and a pop up will appear asking Are you sure you want to clear all personal data select OK to Clear or Cancel to exit Once the data has been cleared a pop up appears stating Personal data cleared 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se System Information After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen the following information will be available System Information When System Information is selected a System Informa tion screen will appear displaying the system software version Guidelines For Race Track Use Of Your SRT WARNING Always drive carefully within your capabilities Never drive in a reckless or dangerous manner which can jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents NOTE Due to the extreme conditions encountered dur ing track use any damage or wear associated with track use is not covered by the manufacturer s warranty If your SRT vehicle is equipped with Drive Modes they will alter the vehicle s performance in various driving s
303. installed and the Re mote Start Keyless Enter N Go Key Fob is in the passenger compartment 362 STARTING AND OPERATING Normal Starting Using The ENGINE START STOP Button Automatic Transmission Only 1 2 The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START STOP button once The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting push the button again NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Using The ENGINE START STOP Button Manual Transmission Only 1 Press and hold the clutch pedal while pushing and holding the ENGINE START STOP button 2 Release the button when the engine starts If the vehicle fails to start within 15 seconds release the button wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure 3 If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting release the button NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal STARTING AND OPERATING 363 To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button Automatic Transmission Only 1 Place the shift lever in P
304. ion to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer They want to know if you need assistance If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con cern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealer name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage FCA US LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 423 6343 FCA Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French ee YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 571 In Mexico Contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired custome
305. ipment to the vehicle s electrical sys tem This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call To avoid inter ference that can cause the 9 1 1 Call system to fail never add aftermarket equipment e g two way mobile radio CB radio data recorder etc to your vehicle s electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BAT TERY POWER FOR ANY REASON INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT THE UCONNECT FEATURES APPS AND SERVICES AMONG OTHERS WILL NOT OPERATE Modifications to any part of the 9 1 1 Call system could cause the air bag system to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to help protect you ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 9 1 1 Call System Limitations Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9 1 1 Call system capabilities 9 1 1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and Mexico may not answer or respond to 9 1 1 system calls If the 9 1 1 Call system detects a malfunction any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected and at the beginning of each ignition cycle The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST and 9 1 1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red The Device Screen will display the following message Vehicle device requires service Please contact your dealer An In Vehicle Audio message will state Vehicle de vice requ
306. ir or sealant mode Selecting Air Mode g Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to A this position for air pump operation only Use the Black Air Pump Hose 7 when selecting this mode Selecting Sealant Mode Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to this position to inject the Tire v Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire Use the Sealant Hose clear hose 6 when selecting this mode WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 467 Using The Power Button Push and release the Power Button 4 once to C turn On the Tire Service Kit Push and release the Power Button 4 again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit Using The Deflation Button VV Push the Deflation Button 2 to reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes over inflated Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 prior to the expiration date printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label to assure optimum operation of the system Refer to Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit section F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement 0604018634 Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location e The Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 are a one tire application use and need to be replaced after each use Always replace these components immediately at your original equipment vehicle dealer e When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form clean water and a damp cloth wil
307. ire If the wheel has any damage If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel Continued WARNING Continued Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat source A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided Failure to follow these warn ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair eyes or clothing Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled swallowed or absorbed through the skin It causes skin eye and respiratory irritation Flush immedi ately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin Change clothing as soon as possible if there is any contact with clothing Continued 470 WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Continued e Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex In case of an allergic reaction or rash consult a phy sician immediately Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of children If swallowed rinse mouth imme diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water Do not induce vomiting Consult a physician immediately Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit A Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit 1 Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle s Hazar
308. ires service Please contact your dealer 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you will not have 9 1 1 Call services If the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated have an authorized dealer service the 9 1 1 Call system immediately The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the system is detected If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi nated have an authorized dealer service the Occu pant Restraint Control system immediately Even if the 9 1 1 Call system is fully functional factors beyond FCA US LLC s control may prevent or stop the 9 1 1 Call system operation These include but are not limited to the following factors e Delayed accessories mode is active The ignition is in the OFF position The vehicle s electrical systems are not intact The 9 1 1 Call system software and or hardware are damaged during a crash The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon nected during a vehicle crash 1X voice data or 3G data network and or Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or ob structed Equipment malfunction at the 9 1 1 operator facility Operator error by the 9 1 1 operator 1X voice data or 3G data network congestion Weather Buildings structures geographic terrain or tunnels ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF
309. is manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle WARNING Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision Continued 440 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING
310. it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Continued Event Data Recorder EDR Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service If your seat including your This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to How various systems in your vehicle wer
311. ith an ALR and is being used for normal usage only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click In Automatic Locking Mode the shoulder belt is auto matically pre locked The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint Continued WARNING Continued e Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the en
312. ituations It is recommended that your vehicle operates in SPORT or TRACK modes during the track event Prior to each track event day Verify all fluids are at the correct levels Refer to Maintaining Your Vehicle for fluid levels amp specifi cations e Verify the front and rear brake pads have more than the original pad thickness remaining If the brake pads require changing please burnish prior to track outing at full pace Refer to Track Burnishing Your Brakes ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 At the conclusion of each track event it is recommended that a brake bleed procedure be performed to maintain the pedal feel and stopping capability of your Brembo High Performance brake system It is recommended that each track outing end with a minimum of one cool down lap using minimal braking Change the differential and manual transmission fluid after every five hours of track use Refer to Maintaining Your Vehicle for fluid levels amp specifications If equipped with a removable lower front fascia grille it is recommended to remove it for track use during warm hot weather to improve cooling airflow to critical powertrain and cooling system components All SRT vehicles are track tested for 24 hours of endur ance however it is recommended that the suspension system brake system prop shaft and half shaft boots should be inspected for wear or damage after every track event Track usage result
313. ke turn the engine OFF remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle when the ignition is in the OFF mode the auto matic transmission is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement When leaving the vehicle always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the transmission gear selector Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 373 WARNING Continued Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal 374 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of
314. l is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom mended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean Continued 504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued CAUTION over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water e Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source wi
315. l remove the material 468 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se from the vehicle or tire and wheel components Once the sealant dries it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded For optimum performance make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire Service Kit You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle tires The kit also comes with two needles located in the Accessory Storage Compartment on the bottom of the air pump for inflating sport balls rafts or similar inflatable items However use only the Air Pump Hose 7 and make sure the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1 4 inch 6 mm diameter in the tread of your vehicle Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 469 WARNING Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1 4 inch 6 mm or larger If the tire has any sidewall damage If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat t
316. lated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys CAUTION tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety The TPMS has been optimized for the original of reasons including the installation of replacement or equipment tires and wheels T
317. le loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll overs especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Ready Alert Braking RAB Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver The EBC will prepare the brake system for a panic stop STARTING AND OPERATING 419 Rainy Brake Support RBS TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Rainy Brake Support may improve braking performance Tire Markings in wet conditions It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors It functions when the wind shield wipers are in LO or HI speed When Rainy Brake Support is active there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required jS v yous 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety Standards 4 Maximum Load Code TIN 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades 420 STARTING AND OPERATIN
318. le response and increased ease of maneuverability inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil trans in tight spaces The system will vary its assist to provide mission axle etc for signs of contamination i e light efforts while parking and good feel while driving If fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after the electric steering system experiences a fault that driving through standing water Do not continue to prevents it from providing assist you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually CAUTION Continued operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami nated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Continued 400 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected through the Uconnect System Refer to the Drive Modes in this section for further information WARNING Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible If the Steering icon is displayed and the SER VICE POWER STEERING or the POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF SERVICE SYSTEM message is displayed within the Driver Infor mation Displ
319. le will start in Default Mode unless Valet or ECO mode if equipped is active This mode is for typical driving conditions where the Traction and Trans mission will be operating in their Street settings which cannot be changed while in this mode The Steering and UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 Suspension can be configured in either the Street Sport or Track modes and the Paddle Shifters may be enabled or disabled while in this mode Custom Mode Default Power Transmission Paddle Shift Traction Suspension Custom Set Up Radio Media Controls 0415080793 Custom Mode The Custom Mode may be selected quickly by pushing the SRT button on the instrument panel switch bank two 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M times or pressing the Custom button on the touch screen Custom Mode allows the you to create a custom configuration that is saved for quick selection of your favorite settings While in Custom Mode the Power Traction Transmission Steering Suspension and Paddle Shifter settings are shown in their current configuration P FM 97 1 HD1 p Custom Mode Set Up Traction Paddles Susp Track Track Sport Sport Street Street Street a CEN 59 2 7 Radio Controls Climate Nav Media Phone Custom Mode Set Up 6 2L Example While in the Custom Drive Mode screen press the Custom Set Up b
320. lltale Indicator Light High Beam Indicator Light Blue Telltale Light What It Means High Beam Indicator Light Z This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on Push the multifunction control ES lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SSS White Telltale Indicator Light Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light White Telltale Light O Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light What It Means This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY DID The Driver Information Display DID features an inter active display which is located in the instrument cluster 55 1 Speedometer SW 0226051650 Driver Information Display DID Display This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pushing the arrow buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel The DID Menu Items consists of the following Speedometer Vehicle Info e Performance If Equipped e Driver Assist If Equipped Fuel Economy e Trip e Audio Messages Screen Setup Diagnostics If Equipped 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The system allows the driver to select information by UP And DOWN Arrow B
321. lly Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the Brake Warning Light indicates system failure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the MAX mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed 520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re WARNING Continued fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake taining Your Vehicle for further information fluid in a open container absorbs moi
322. lue and or that slow pressure loss is occurring In these cases optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence In any situation in which the message on the display is See manual it is ESSENTIAL to refer to the contents of the Wheels paragraph in the Technical data chapter strictly com plying with the indications that you find there IMPORTANT Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised Stop the vehicle avoiding sharp braking and steering Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inf
323. lular phones small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories The power outlets are labeled with either a key or a battery symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered Power outlets labeled with a key can be powered when the ignition is in the ON or ACC position while the outlets labeled with a battery are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times These power outlets can also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit NOTE The front integrated center stack power outlet can be changed from switched ignition to constant bat tery powered all the time by moving the integrated center stack fuse 12 in the Rear Power Distribution Center from fuse location IGN to B Refer to Rear Power Distribution Center Fuses in Main taining Your Vehicle To ensure proper operation a MOPAR cigar knob and element must be used The front power outlet is located next to the storage area on the integrated center stack of the instrument panel UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 0346051816 Power Outlet Integrated Center Stack Front Power Outlet Center Console NOTE All accessories connected to these powered out lets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts
324. m gearbox system or steering system blows contact an authorized dealer A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn web bing etc Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders NOTE The cupholder cannot be removed MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531 Front Power Distribution Center Fuses CAUTION The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment This module contains fuses and relays When installing the power distribution center cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected It 072710829 Front Power Distribution Center 532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M
325. m Low Beam Select Switch 142 Lights On Reminder 141 On With Wipers 138 148 PASSING Crede Y C Ae e cios 142 SWI Gaim eh hey Sa wig Rae eee 137 506 INDEX Time Delay sse teastas Rem eom t os 140 Wahe 509 Headlight Washers 509 Head Restraints 131 Head 229 ox 44 6 131 Heated 111 Heater Engine Block 4 ede ne RR ra 367 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 142 Hill Start AsSISt etre EYE WRER ER S 409 HomeLink Garage Door 196 Hood R leas seek pb ne 135 Ignition RS E CEA 12 Illuminated 21 Immobilizer Sentry 16 Information Center Vehicle 253 Inside Rearview 103 Instrument Cluster 221 224 232 234 250 Instrument Panel And Controls 220 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 529 Interior Appearance 527 Interior Lights e Sais Ras RR 143 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 146 Introduction za E Rr rads irre e RR ung 4 iPod Coritrol sereset RR OER s 319 iPod USB MP3 Control 219 Bluetooth St
326. mage will be displayed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear NOTE The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has pro grammable modes of operation that may be selected through the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Set tings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature and it is turned ON the rear camera image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed ex ceeds 8 mph 13 km h the transmission is shifted into PARK or the vehicle s ignition is cycled to the OFF position When the Vehicle is shifted out of Reverse with camera delay turned OFF the rear camera mode is exited and the last touchscreen appears again When enabled active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position The active guide lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone Zo
327. mal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement e Distance driven Performance tires tires with a speed rating of V or higher and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main tenance schedule is highly recommended WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicator Refer to the Tire and Loading STARTING AND OPERATING 439 Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart ex ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of th
328. matic Transmission 372 Shift Speeds ca cerisa ened e aad 370 Shift Speeds Manual Transmission 370 Shoulder 5 46 Side View Mirror Adjustment 110 Signals Turn ws a Ee us 96 142 250 Snow Chains Tire 440 SNOW 5 54 d aie on eae ed 436 Spark PLUGS 4k bue E ER Biers 549 550 Specifications Fuel 549 550 Oi erase 549 550 Speed s cede enda dna e s 261 262 263 Speed Control Accel Decel iki eae ha 155 157 Cancel 3 arcte UC Ae d 155 Resum eR LR eR RE EET UR EE PERS 155 SCE nou iuga cues o y ERE REG 154 Speed Control Cruise Control 153 154 157 SRT Console Shifter 381 5 one coarser as 263 Lap History 264 Paddle 5 381 TIMES c eh Tr e 261 262 263 Top Speed INDEX 595 SRT Performance 289 UAL UDG Sata ol ser acne ras 27 359 Automatic Transmission 360 Cold Weather 365 Engine Fails To 365 Iii E ogee cease Ge oie TIT TTL TT eee 27 Starting And
329. methods to lock the vehicle e Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and or passenger door open e Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE same exterior zone refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information e Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter 3 If any doors are open close them To Disarm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if equipped refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further infor mation Advance the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position NOTE The driver s door key cylinder and the Trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during power trunk entry Pushing the trunk button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the alarm will sound e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
330. n signal before changing lanes Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Rear Cross Path If Equipped The Rear Cross Path RCP feature is intended to aid the drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected alert the driver UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 NOTE In a parking lot situation oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles the system will not be able to alert the driver When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms including reducing the radio volume WARNING RCP is not a Back Up Aid system It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation Drivers must be careful when RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of backing up even when using RCP Always check the vehicle for objects that are moving toward the side of carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles 3 mph 5 km h to objects
331. n Exit Programming e If wearing gloves on your hands or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle the unlock sensitivity can be affected resulting in a slower re sponse time The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ifthe vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry door handle and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds the vehicle will re lock and if equipped will arm the security alarm To Unlock From The Driver s Side With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver door handle grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver s door automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked 021867956 Grab The Door Handle To Unlock NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver s door handle To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger door handle grab the front passenger door handle t
332. n is released The decrease in set speed is re flected in the DID display To Cancel The following conditions will cancel the Normal Fixed Speed Electronic Speed Control without clearing the memory e The brake pedal is applied e The CANCEL button is pushed The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates The vehicle parking brake is applied The braking temperature exceeds normal range over heated The shift lever gear selector is removed from the Drive position To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if The Normal Fixed Speed Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button is pushed The ignition is turned off The Adaptive Cruise Control ACC On Off button is pushed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING FCW IF EQUIPPED Forward Collision Warning FCW Operation The Forward Collision Warning FCW system provides the driver with audible warnings visual warnings within the DID to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal collision The warnings are intended to provide the driver with enough time to react avoid or mitigate the potential collision NOTE FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the
333. n some collisions Side Air Bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags NOTE Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment Side Impacts In side impacts the side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection In side impacts the Side Air Bags deploy independently a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions including some collisions at certain angles or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced Front Air Bags deploy Rollover Events Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover events The ORC determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro priate based on the severity and type of collision Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events The rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may be in progress an
334. n the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes objectionable increase blower speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side win dows Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur e Automatic Temperature Controls ATC will automati cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield When this occurs recirculation will be unavailable Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter The climate control system filters outside air containing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in
335. n the desired setting e Speed Adjusted Volume This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the Off 1 2 or 3 button on the touchscreen e Surround Sound If Equipped This feature provides simulated surround sound mode To make your selection press the Surround Sound button on the touchscreen select On or Off 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e AUX Volume Offset If Equipped This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input To make your selection press the AUX Volume Match button on the touchscreen choose a level from 3 to 3 Loudness If Equipped Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes To make your selection press the Loudness button on the touchscreen then choose Yes or No Phone Bluetooth After pressing the Phone Bluetooth button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Paired Phones This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Supplement Manual e Paired Audio Sources This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Supplement Manual SiriusXM Setup If Equipped After pressing the SiriusXM Setup button on the touch
336. ne Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0 1 ft 0 30 cm Yellow 1 ft 6 5 ft 30 cm 2 m Green 6 5 ft or greater 2 m or greater WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob structions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up CAUTION To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only be used as a parking aid The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom mended that the driver look frequently over his her Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death shoulder when using ParkView ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights and sunglass storage Universal Garage Door Opener HomeLink button and a power sunroof switch may also be included if equipped Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights At the forwar
337. ng vehicle is out of view en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 NOTE e The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly To opt out of the Advanced Auto High Beam Sensitiv ity Control default and enter Reduced High Beam Sensitivity Control not recommended toggle high beam lever 6 full on off cycles within 10 seconds of ignition ON System will return to default setting upon ignition off If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control mirror is replaced the mirror must be re aimed to ensure proper performance See your local authorized dealer To Activate 1 Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position 2 Push the multifunction lever away from you toward front of vehicle to engage the high beam mode NOTE This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 15 mph 24 km h 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To Deactivate 1 Pull the multifunction lever toward you or rearward in vehicle to manually deactivate the system
338. ngaged ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The power tilt telescoping steering column lever is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column 031836848 Power Tilt Telescoping Switch To tilt the steering column move the lever up or down as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as desired 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it can ope
339. nge is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 555 Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Driver Informa tion Display DID in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information At Each Stop For Fuel e Check the engine oil level Refer to Maintenance Procedures Engine Oil in Maintaining Your Ve hicle for further information e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once A Month Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage Inspect the battery and clean and
340. ngine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid if equipped or brake fluid leaks are suspected The cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B 5 103 BLIND SPOT MONITORING BSM IF Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 103 EQUIPPED hie 114 Outside Mirrors 110 Rear ites Path Outside Mirrors Folding Feature 110 Modes OFC s RE ERE 111 General 123 Heated Mirrors If 111 la SEAIS aero vse nes eee 95559592259 123 Vanity ae dates 112 ROWE OCA Illuminated Vanity Mirrors 112 M E i 125 Slide On Rod And Extender Features Of Front Ventilated Seats If Equipped 128 VISOE Meera ts doe a e a e 113 Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment 128 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE es Manual Front Seatback Recline 129 Lights On Reminder 141 Passenger Seat Easy Entry
341. nging the theme will modify the background image highlight color and button highlight of the display screen Set Language When in this display you may select one of multiple languages English Francais Espafiol for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navi gation system if equipped Press the Set Language button on the touchscreen then press the desired lan guage button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the language showing that setting has been selected Touchscreen Beep When in this display you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touchscreen button button on the touch screen is pressed Press the Touchscreen Beep button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected e Control Screen Time Out If Equipped When this feature is selected the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out With the feature deselected the screen will stay open until it is manually closed Press the Control Screen Time Out button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster If Equipped When this feature is selected the turn by turn directions will appear in the Driver Information Display DID as the vehicle approaches a design
342. nlocks This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first push of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Flash Lights With Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Headlight Illumination On Approach This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through Uconnect To change the current set ting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Lock The Doors Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Sound Horn With Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STA
343. nning the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be ser viced as soon as possible if this occurs 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss CAUTION WARNING Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced Light MIL on could cause damage to the engine above can reach higher temperatures than in normal control system It also could affect fuel economy and operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive driveability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry converter damage and power loss will soon occur plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death Immediate service is required or serious injury to the driver occupants or others ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Electronic Stability Control ESC Indicator Light If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Electronic Stability Control ESC Indicator Light The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the
344. ns Vehicle Security Alarm Security Alarm Vehicle Storage s cs OES ales Viscosity Engine i a rer e 3 598 INDEX eee Voice Recognition System 336 Warning Flasher 462 Warnings And Cautions 6 Warranty Information 572 Washer Adding Fluid 222222222224 44204 4 509 Washers Windshield 145 147 509 Washing Vehicle oa ote ees 524 Water Driving Through sse ems 397 Wheel And Wheel 526 Wheel And Wheel Trim 526 Wind Buffeting eve tea weg eae S 207 Window Fogging 333 WindOWS xw 38 POWER MMC 38 Windshield Defroster 94 Windshield 145 147 509 E 509 Windshield Wiper Blades 509 Windshield Wipers 54 22 re 145 Wiper Blade Replacement 509 Wipers Intermittent 146 Wipers Rain 148 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed
345. nspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Continued es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511 CAUTION Continued In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly WARNING Continued A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con tact anything that can burn CAUTION The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine perfor mance and cause serious damage to the engin
346. ntaining Your Vehicle for further information CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool ant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en gine coolant antifreeze or any globally compat ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency the cooling system will need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh Continued MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515 CAUTION Continued OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 by an au thorized dealer as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 that al lows extended maintenance intervals This engine cool ant antifreeze can be used up to ten years or 150 00
347. ntil The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor The distance setting is changed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 e The system disengages Refer to the information on ACC Activation The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited how ever the driver can always apply the brakes manually if necessary NOTE The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance If this occurs a visual alert BRAKE will flash in the DID and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity 0324049882 Brake Alert NOTE The Brake Screen in the DID is a warning for the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying the brakes autonomously 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Overtake Aid When driving with ACC engaged and following a ve hicle the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on the left hand side Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu The DID displays the
348. nto second or fifth gear If you let the shift lever move in the direction of the pulling you may end shifting from first to fourth or from sixth to third gear CAUTION Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete stop before shifting into REVERSE Failure to do so may result in transmission damage You must always use first gear or REVERSE when starting from a standing position Recommended Shift Speeds To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel economy it should be upshifted as listed in recom mended shift speed chart ee STARTING AND OPERATING 371 MANUAL TRANSMISSION RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS Engine 1 4 4 5 5 6 6 2L Supercharged mph 25 42 km h 32 40 67 6 4L mph 37 48 km h 32 59 77 Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions relatively steady speeds may result in increased fuel economy Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired acceleration rate 1 4 Skip Shift There are times when you must shift the transmission directly from first gear to fourth gear instead of from first gear to second gear This is to help you get the best possible fuel economy from your vehicle This occurs when the engine coolant antifreeze is higher than 106 F 41 C vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph 30 km h but less than 21 mph 34 km h and the transmission is in first gear and the accelerator is at throttle or less After you shift th
349. o eight seconds for a self check when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a mal function in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc tion is detected that could affect the air bag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position e The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval e The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec tion Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately WARNING Ignoring t
350. o should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX Ibs or XXX kg cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 lbs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 295 kg since 5 x 150 Ibs 68 kg 750 Ibs 340 kg and 1400 165 635 kg 750 Ibs 340 kg 650 lbs 295 kg Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 eee STARTING AND OPERATING 429 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle The follow ing table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configu
351. o unlock both doors automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked NOTE All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver s door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle FOBIK Safe To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition is in the OFF position FOBIK Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK Safe search in any passive entry vehicle 1 A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter while a door is ajar 2 A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle while a door is ajar 3 Alock request is made by the door panel switch while the door is ajar When any of these situations occur after all ajar doors are shut the FOBIK Safe search will be executed If it finds a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside the car and it does not find any Passive Entry RKE transmitters outside the car the car will unlock and alert the customer 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter
352. occurs in 240 Seconds The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi tive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 wiper sensitivity Setting 4 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system NOTE The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high speed position The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind shield Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms and will not op
353. ocution MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED Six Speed Manual Transmission WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline 368 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE During cold weather you may experience in creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid e Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch warms up This is normal pedal or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch Refer to Electronic Brake Control System Hill Start Assist in Start ing And Operating for further information e Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor may cause increased shift efforts and may result in damage to the clutch and transmission Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while driving as this may result in transmission synchro nizer damage Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rear wheels are spinning due to loss of traction Dam 3 age to the transmission may occur Manual Shifter ee STARTING AND OPERATING 369 NOTE Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain TD ls ou may hear your transmission This can be most Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse y y y inhibitor system When v
354. oductive when you know exactly how to get to where you want to go Navigation is optional on the Uconnect 8 4A system See your dealer to activate navigation at any time oo an 1 To enter a destination push the VR button After ilii the beep say etting driver temperature to 70 4 t BR For the 8 4A Uconnect System say Enter state Phone Manager Apps Settings Climate Radio For the 8 4AN Uconnect System say Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills Michigan Uconnect 8 4A 8 4AN Climate 2 Then follow the system prompts UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345 TIP To start a POI search push the VR button After Uconnect Access 8 4A 8 4AN the beep say Find nearest coffee shop WARNING ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road Some Uconnect Access services including 9 1 1 and Assist will NOT work without an operable 1X voice data or 3G data network connection rem e di Where To View Map Information Emergency NOTE Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho Settings Stop SET nopea rized by the subscriber m E An included trial and or subscription is required to take maa o eU pte 2 advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next 0307077992 section of this guide To register with Uconnect Access Uconnect 8 4A 8 4AN Navigation press the Apps button on the 8 4 inch touchscreen to get start
355. of time Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface tempera ture of the seat 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Front Ventilated Seats If Equipped Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures The fans operate at two speeds HI and LO The front ventilated seats control buttons are located within the Uconnect system You can gain access to the control buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI e Press the ventilated seat button second time to choose LO e Press the ventilated seat button third time to turn the ventilated seat OFF NOTE The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a remote start This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Manual Forward Or Rearw
356. ogramming A Single HomeLink Button Non Rolling Code To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Non Rolling Code step 2 and follow all remaining steps ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 Canadian Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after several seconds of transmission Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view 3 Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button while you push and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds
357. oice Command push the Phone 23 Listening Say com ny or lt 88 button wand say Call then pronounce the name we il ERU PERS 2 4 edia one 9 ettings Climate Radio exactly as it appears in your phone book When a 0307077990 contact has multiple phone numbers you can say Uconnect 8 4A 8 4AN Phone Call John Smith work Voice Text Reply Uconnect will announce incoming text messages Push the Phone button and say Listen Must have com patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 Once an incoming text message is read to you push the Phone button amp e After the beep say Reply 2 Listen to the Uconnect prompts After the beep repeat one of the pre defined messages and follow the system prompts PRE DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES Yes Stuck in traffic See you later No Start without 77 be late me Okay Where are you I will be Call Are you there lt number gt minutes late I ll call you I need See you in later directions number of I m on my way Can t talk right minutes I m lost now Thanks TIP Your mobile phone must have the full implementa tion of the Message Access Profile MAP to take advan tage of this feature For details about MAP visit UconnectPhone com Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only
358. omatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position If the ignition switch is left in the RUN position the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity if the vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h and the engine is not running If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph 8 km h the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short pushes in a row before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the vehicle is stopped placed in park and the button is pushed twice to the OFF position Keyless Enter N Go Functions With Driver s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal Clutch Pedal In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position The Keyless Enter N Go feature operates similar to an ignition switch It has three positions OFF ACC and RUN To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position 1 Push the ENGINE START STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position 2 Push the ENGINE START STOP button a second time to change the ignition switch to the RUN position 3 Push the ENGINE START STOP button a third time to return the ignition switch to the OFF position STARTING AND OPERATING 365 Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C WARNING Continued To ensure reliable starting at thes
359. on 4 5 Quarts 4 2 Liters forming to MS 90032 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Fluid Capacities SRT 6 4L US Metric Fuel Approximate 91 Octane or higher 0 15 Ethanol 18 5 Gallons 70 Liters Engine Oil With Filter SAE 0W 40 Synthetic API Certified 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters Cooling System MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant OAT coolant conforming to 15 Quarts 14 4 Liters MS 90032 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS CAUTION Continued Important Information CAUTION Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool ant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en gine coolant antifreeze or any globally compat ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency the cooling system will need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh Continued OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 by an au thorized dealer as soon
360. on old rotors still need to be burnished New rotors installed with old pads should be burnished at the track or street driven for 300 city miles to develop an adequate lining transfer layer on the rotor surface prior to track use Rotors that pulsate during track use should be re placed Resurfacing of the rotors is not recommended as it removes mass from the rotor reducing its thermal capacity Resurfacing also thins the rotor cheek mak ing it less robust and increasing the likelihood of pulsation in further track use DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc ee STARTING AND OPERATING 397 Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the followin
361. ons below See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt to check what type of seat belt each seating position has THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 4 If the child restraint has a tether strap connect it to the top tether anchorage See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for direc tions to attach a tether anchor 5 Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufac turer s instructions 6 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on
362. ons carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 2 iO Iglo i ED 3 ELECTRONIC STABEITY ii p i i du E O 14 i amp i i x s Di i i f 8 1 i E A EI i lt t 8 2 i f 1910 cS H D ie ima la im TI i i i i i i i i i i HEATED i EI 9 t gt TEM ique B ub i i g i i 3 i JE
363. or mance and damage the emissions control system e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser vice Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance Continued 452 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Continued Carbon Monoxide Warnings The use of fuel additives which are now being WARNING sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine you running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions control system
364. or further information Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Multifunction Lever 031563089 The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn Multifunction Lever signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights NOTE e If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective e A Turn Signal On message will appear in the Drivers Information Display DID and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi 1 6 km with either turn signal on Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you
365. or off highway or off road use enhanced venice stability otterea Dy the Sys only and should not be used on any public roadways In tem is reduced this mode TCS and ESC features turned OFF To enter Trailer Sway control TSC is disabled when the the Full Off mode push and hold the ESC Off switch ESC system is in the Partial Off mode for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running After five seconds a chime will sound the ESC Off Indicator Light will illuminate and the 416 STARTING AND OPERATING M ESC OFF message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC To turn ESC ON again NING C momentarily push the ESC Off switch to assist in maintaining stability ESC Off mode is intended for off highway or off road use only NOTE System may switch from ESC Full Off to Partial e With the ESC switched off the enhanced vehicle mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed stability offered by ESC is unavailable In an When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined emergency evasive maneuver the ESC system will speed the system will return to ESC Full Off not engage to assist in maintaining stability Full ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes if Off mode is only intended for off highway or equipped off road use wARNNG ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and WARNING ESC OFF Indicato
366. or steering wheel covers of any type and material This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat 032173457 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED Electronic Speed Control Buttons When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over 1 ON OFF 4 SET DECEL accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph n Roc CANCEL 40 km h 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button to activate the electronic speed control CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control is on To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control is off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed
367. or typical track driving The ABS Transmission Steering and Suspension systems are all set to their TRACK settings Steering wheel mounted paddle shifters are enabled 386 STARTING AND OPERATING Se SPORT MODE This mode is a predefined configu ration optimized for typical enthusiast driving The ABS Transmission Steering and Suspension systems are all set to their SPORT settings Steering wheel mounted paddle shifters are enabled e CUSTOM MODE This mode allows the driver to create a custom vehicle configuration that is saved for quick selection of favorite settings The system will return to Default mode when the ignition switch is cycled from RUN to OFF to RUN if this mode is selected While in Custom Mode the Traction Trans mission Steering Suspension and Paddle shifter set tings may be configured through the custom mode set up in any combination FM 97 1 HD1 Custom Mode Set Up info Traction Paddles Susp Track On Track Sport Sport Off Street Street ee LL gt SY Nav Controls Apps b ad Climate Phone 0415080795 Radio Media Custom Mode Set Up Listed below is a description of each of these settings Transmission Trans e Track provides the fastest shift speeds and has the highest comfort trade off STARTING AND OPERATING 387 e Sport provides a faster shift speed and has a moderate comfort trade off e Street provides a balance
368. orage that is approved for that seating position located behind the top of the vehicle seat See the section Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren LATCH Restraint System for the location of ap proved tether anchorages in your vehicle W 5 0226047162 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 1 Look behind the seating position where you dili plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available 2 Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint 3 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and where possible route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts If not possible lower the head 4 Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram side of the head restraint Tether Strap Mounting 1 Cover A Tether Strap Hook 3 Attaching Strap B Tether Anchor 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR V
369. ort button on the touchscreen to adjust the steering effort to the higher level e Street Press the Street button on the touchscreen to adjust the steering effort to the lowest level Race Options 10 10 Nw out Sport Custom Default Power 700 1 Transmission Track Paddle Shifters On i ace c8 i NE S Track 1 Traction Suspension Track Set Up 2 am Phone 0305081334 Radio Media Controls Race Options Press the Race Options button on the touchscreen while in the Drive Modes screen to display the vehicle s Launch Control screen Within Race Options you can activate deactivate and adjust the RPM values for the Launch Control and Shift Light features ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 Launch Control WARNING Launch Mode is intended for off highway or off road use only and should not be used on any public roadways It is recommended that this feature be used in a controlled environment and within the limits of the law The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the performance pages must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which can jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents 4 37 Race Options ET Launch Control Activate Launch Control Shift Light j Launch RPM Set Up ot Nav Phone Activate Launch Control Launch Con
370. ossibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected Rear Power Distribution Center MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 2 60 Amp Yellow Front PDC Feed 1 3 Fuse Spare 4 60 Amp Yellow Front PDC Feed 2 5 30 Amp Pink Sunroof 20 Amp Blue Police Dome Lamp Police 6 40 Amp Green Exterior Lighting 1 7 40 Amp Green Exterior Lighting 2 8 30 Amp Pink Interior Lighting 9 40 Amp Green Power Locks 10 30 Amp Pink Driver Door Control Module 11 30 Amp Pink Passenger Door Control Module 12 20 Amp Yellow Dual USB Center Console Rear Cigar Lighter IP If Equipped 15 40 Amp Green HVAC Blower 16 20 Amp Blue Left Spot Lamp Police 538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 17 Fuse Spare 18 30 Amp Pink Mod Network Interface Police 19 Fuse Spare 20 Fuse Spare 21 30 Amp Pink Fuel Pump 22 20 Amp Yellow Right Spot Lamp Police lice 23 10 Fuel Door Diagnostic Port
371. ou see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads 240 F 116 C or greater pull over and stop the vehicle Idle WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS GE the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until Proper lug nut bolt torque is very important to ensure the pointer drops back into the normal range 200 that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle Any 230 F 93 110 C If the pointer remains at 240 F time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the 116 C or greater and you hear a chime turn the vehicle the lug nuts bolts should be torqued using a engine off immediately and call for service properly calibrated torque wrench 464 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Torque Specifications Lug Nut Bolt Torque Lug Nut Lug Nut Bolt Size Bolt Socket Size 111 Ft Lbs 150 N m M14 x 1 50 22 mm Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug nuts bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles 0605005441 Wheel Mounting Surface Tighten the lug nuts bolts in a star pattern until each nut bolt has been tightened twice
372. ound a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area 502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in the Mainte nance Schedules section for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such remova
373. ove the vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle Manual Transmission If Equipped The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To release the parking brake pull the parking brake release handle b Manual Transmission Parking Brake Release Automatic Transmission If Equipped The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage STARTING AND OPERATING 403 Automatic Transmission Parking Brake WARNING e Never use the PARK position of an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked Continued 404 STARTING AND OPERATING
374. owing that the setting has been selected Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle Auto Comfort Systems If Equipped After pressing the Auto On Comfort button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Auto On Driver Heated Ventilated Seat amp Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start If Equipped When this feature is selected the driver s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when temperatures are below 40 F 4 4 C When tempera tures are above 80 F 26 7 C the driver vented seat will turn ON To make your selection press the Auto On Driver Heated Ventilated Seat amp Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start button to select from Off Remote Start or All Starts until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Engine Off Options After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Easy Exit Seat If Equipped When this feature is selected the Driver s seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off To make your selection press the Easy Exit Seat button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected e Engine Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect Phone system if equipp
375. p and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body without twists If you can t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed Continued 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing inter nal injuries Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision Continued WARNING Continued A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do no
376. peed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings A C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual operation NOTE Each of these features operates independently from each other If any feature is controlled manually temperature control will continue to operate automati cally Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 Summer Operation The engine cooling system must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro sion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 OAT Organic Additive Technology coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard 5 90032 and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes i
377. play in the DID for five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Use the steering wheel DID controls for the following procedure s 1 Without pushing the brake pedal place the ignition in the ON RUN position do not start the engine E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 2 Push and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu to Vehicle Info 3 Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to access the Oil Life screen 4 Push and hold the OK button to rest oil life If conditions are met the gauge and numeric display will update to show 10076 If conditions are not met a popup message of To reset oil life engine must be off with ignition in run will be displayed for 5 seconds and the user will remain at the Oil Life screen 5 Push and release the DOWN or UP arrow button to exit the submenu screen NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Performance Shift Indicator PSI If Equipped The Performance Shift Indicator PST is enabled on vehicles with manual transmission or when a vehicle with automatic transmission is in manual shift mode The PSI provides
378. pped with dual hydraulic BRAKE brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability the remaining system will still function There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine OFF the brakes will still function The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a high perfor mance braking system The brake pads are a semi metallic compound which offer superior fade resistance for consistent operation A compromise to using this type of brake pad is that the brakes may produce more brake dust and may squeal slightly under certain weather and operating conditions ie during light brake applica tions this is considered normal conditions ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic Brake Control system EBC This system includes Elec tronic Brake Force Distribution EBD Anti Lock Brake System ABS Brake Assist System BAS Hill Start Assist HSA Traction Control System TCS Electronic Stability Control ESC and Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM These systems work together to en
379. pshift or downshift is chosen except as described below e In temporary AutoStick mode shift lever in DRIVE the transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached Lack of accelerator pedal activity will cause the transmission to revert to automatic operation If normal AutoStick mode is engaged shift lever in MANUAL position manual gear selection will be maintained until the shift lever is returned to DRIVE or as described below The transmission will not upshift automatically at redline in this mode nor will downshifts be obtained if the accelerator pedal is pressed to the floor e The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear 384 STARTING AND OPERATING e e The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop After a stop the driver should manually upshift the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated You can start out from a stop in first or second gear Tapping at a stop will allow starting in second gear Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions If a requested downshift would cause the engine to over speed that shift will not occur The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed Holding the paddle depressed or holding the shift lever in the position will downshift the transmis
380. ptional and not available on all vehicles 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Push the VR button After the beep say one of the following commands and follow the prompts to 1 07 3 03 shuffle switch your media source or choose an artist Change source to Bluetooth Am Beatro D Sa Good Vibes e Change source to AUX o e Change source to USB browse e Play artist Beethoven Play album Greatest Hits Play song Moonlight Sonata Play genre Classical Playing the Phone Manager Settings Climate Radio TIP Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all 0307077988 of the music on your AUX or USB device Your Voice Uconnect 8 4A 8 4AN Media Command must match exactly how the artist album song and genre information is displayed Phone Making and answering hands free phone calls is easy with Uconnect When the Phonebook button is illumi nated on your touchscreen your system is ready Check UconnectPhone com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341 Push the Phone button amp e After the beep say of the following commands e Call John Smith UconnectPhone Tan Dial 123 456 7890 and follow the system prompts T Phone Ready Redial call previous outgoing phone number Call back call previous incoming phone number phoneboo nt calls i messaging settings TIP When providing a V
381. pts as desired Speedometer Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Speedometer menu is displayed in the DID Push and release the OK button to toggle units Km h or mph of the digital speedometer Vehicle Info Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Vehicle Info menu is highlighted in the DID Push and release the RIGHT arrow buttons to enter the submenu items of Vehicle Info Follow the directional prompts to access or reset any of the following Vehicle Info submenu items UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 Tire Pressure Monitor Coolant Temp Trans Temp Oil Temp Oil Pressure Oil Life Battery Voltage Intake Air Temp If Equipped Engine Torque If Equipped Engine Power If Equipped Air Fuel Ratio 6 2L Supercharged Boost Pressure 6 2L Supercharged Intercooler Water Temp 6 2L Supercharged Performance Features If Equipped WARNING Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor mance Features is intended for off highway or off road use only and should not be done on any public roadways It is recommended that these features be used in a controlled environment and within the limits of the law The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the performance pages must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which can jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accident
382. r peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 578 INDEX About Your 402 405 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Cruise Control 157 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 515 Adding Fuel 22 x d 453 Adding Washer Fluid zr rm Ene 509 Additives 451 Adjust DOWN doses de she Sethe wha dos 125 55559 deg ea dure RR 5
383. r who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French 572 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited W
384. r Light In the ESC Full Off mode the engine torque The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator reduction and stability features are disabled Light in the instrument cluster will come on Therefore enhanced vehicle stability offered by ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON the ESC system is unavailable In an emergency position It should go out with the engine evasive maneuver the ESC system will not engage running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 417 malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and th
385. r anchorage symbol on it gt 0226073659 Tether Strap Anchorages LATCH compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage Forward facing child restraints and some rear facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage Center Seat LATCH If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position do not use that outboard position If a child seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt do not install a child seat in that outboard position WARNING Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint Please refer to Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System for typical installation instructions Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu facturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here To Install A LATCH Compatible Child Restraint If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR seat belt stow the seat belt following the instructi
386. r is in the passenger compartment The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating positions three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position The three positions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The fourth position is START During start ON RUN will illuminate NOTE In case the ignition does not change with the push of a button the RKE transmitter Key Fob may have a low or dead battery In this situation a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch Put the nose side side opposite of the emergency key of the Key Fob against the engine START STOP button and push to operate the ignition THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 SRT Key Fobs NOTE SRT vehicles equipped with the 6 2L Super charged engine comes with three key fobs two red and one black that allow for different engine power levels Please refer to the Drive Modes in the Uconnect STOP Settings section for further descriptions O B The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob START ENGINE The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead The emergency key is also for locking unlocking the 1 OFF glove compartment You can keep the emergency key ACCESSORY with you when valet parking 3 ON RUN Keyless Push Button Ignition 14 THINGS TO
387. r rear ous for rear center center center center only only only only Arc Left None None None None None 2nd 1st Flash Rear Flashing ing Arc Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd 2nd 1st Flash Rear Flashing Flashing ing Arc Right None None None None None 2nd 1st Flash Rear Flashing ing Radio Volume No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Reduced UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense Pya When the ParkSense system is disabled the ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the Drivers Information Display DID will display ParkSense switch located on the switch panel below the the PARKSENSE OFF message for approxi Uconnect display mately five seconds Refer to Drivers Informa tion Display DID in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the DID will display the PARKSENSE OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is disabled or defective The ParkSense switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled If the ParkSense switch is pushed and the system is disabled or requires service the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily and then the LED will be ON P OFF UY 22 OF F ParkSense Switch 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Service The ParkSense R
388. r the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system op eration or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Using aftermarket tire sealants may Continued 444 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Continued cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS sensor to become inoperable After using an after market tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked e After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPM sensor NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The T
389. r until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Two types of child restraints can be used rear facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rear facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rear facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rear facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rear facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint e Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown
390. rake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL e After pushing the Power Button 4 the sealant white fluid will flow from the Sealant Bottle 1 through the Sealant Hose 6 and into the tire NOTE Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire If the sealant white fluid does not flow within 0 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Push the Power Button 4 to turn Off the Tire Service Kit Disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem Make sure the valve stem is free of debris Reconnect the Sealant Hose 6 to the valve stem Check that the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode Push the Power Button 4 to turn On the Tire Service Kit 2 Connect the Power Plug 8 to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle if available Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the Tire Service Kit 3 The Sealant Bottle 1 may be empty due to previous use Call for assistance 472 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Sx NOTE If the Mode Select Knob 5 is on Air Mode and the pump is operating air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose 7 only not the Sealant Hose 6 If the sealant white fluid does flow through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose typically takes 30 70 seconds As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose 6 the Pressure Gauge 3 can read as high as 70 p
391. rate for up to 100 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm The heated steering wheel control button is located within the Uconnect system You can gain access to the control button through the climate screen or the controls screen e Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn the heating element ON Press the heated steering wheel button a second time to turn the heating element OFF NOTE The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start through the Uconnect system Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 WARNING The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat such as a blanket
392. ration is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation 354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not ex pressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci fications were met Additional Information 2015 FCA US LLC All rights reserved Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC Android is a trademark of Google Inc SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc Yelp Yelp logo Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp Uconnect System Support e US residents call 877 855 8400 24 hours a day 7 days a week or visit DriveUconnect com e Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English or 800 387 9983 French or visit DriveUconnect ca Mon Fri 8 00 am 8 00 pm ET Sat 9 00 am 5 00 pm ET Sun Closed Uconnect Access Services Support 855 792 4241 Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS
393. rations and num ber and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 892 kg 430 STARTING AND OPERATING Ses Combined weight of AVAILABLE occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and TOTAR FRONT REAR from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Occupant 1 200 Ibs Weight 865 Ibs 195 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 tbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs minus 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 15 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811 4411 E STARTING AND OPERATING 431 WARNING Safety WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions e Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them Overinflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION j y mn M shock Objects the road chuckholes Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve hicle handl
394. re engage after en gine shutdown perform this procedure only in a desired location preferably at your authorized dealer Ts 2 Stop the vehicle Shift the transmission into PARK if possible If not shift the transmission to NEUTRAL Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns OFF Wait approximately 30 seconds Restart the engine Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required AUTOSTICK Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or Console Mounted Shifter AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control giving you more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance 382 STARTING AND OPERATING This system can also provide you with more control Operation curing passing cold slippery When the shift lever is in the DRIVE D position the mountain driving and many other situations transmission will operate automatically shifting b
395. reaming Audio 319 Jump Starting 476 478 Key Fob Arm The Alarm 19 Lock The Doors cem Re IRR Rees 23 Panic Alarm sss ze ke en 24 Programming Additional Key Fobs 18 24 Programming Additional Transmitters 18 24 Remote Keyless Entry 22 ee INDEX 587 Unlatch The Trunk soe Re rye s 24 Unlock The wok 22 Key In Reminder sim Rr 28044 15 Keyless 33 361 Enter The Trunk e eek ak 24 Lock Vehicle s Doors 23 280 Passive Entry Programming 280 Unlock From The Driver s Side 22 Unlock From The Passenger Side 22 Keyless Entry 22 Keyless 50 52 s e y odes 12 Key 17 ie aed See aid Ake dar dre edes urne 12 Key Sentry Immobilizer 16 Lane Change And Turn Signals 142 Lane Change Assist sss cR Ren 142 Lap HIStOrY ciuem ese nre ace tes 264 SRD cest fresti panem d Kap er vd Rag dre a 264 Lap Shoulder 46 Lap secta dca e 263 ORE ai eda b hd ig e d ebd hd ad eR debes 263 Latches a a a a aes IURE RU ORE Ra 96 Hood
396. reeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine OFF and cold the level of the coolant in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month 518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allow
397. requested by the BSM system the radio volume is reduced e If the hazard flashers are on the system will request the appropriate visual alert only When the system is in RCP the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio volume is reduced Turn hazard signal status is ignored the RCP state always requests the chime ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems NOTE The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used General Information This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission FCC rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS GEN 210 220 310 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 The device may not cause harmful interference 2 The device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration of the device Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle
398. res Please refer to Uconnect Settings within your Owner s Manual on the DVD for further information 2 Press the Launch RPM Set Up button on the touch screen This screen will allow you to adjust your launch RPM s for optimum launch traction 3 Press the Activate Launch Mode button on the touchscreen 4 Make sure the vehicle is not moving 5 Make sure the steering wheel is pointing straight 6 Fully depress the clutch pedal and make sure the vehicle is in first gear 7 While holding the clutch depressed rapidly apply the accelerator pedal to wide open throttle The engine speed will hold at the pre selected launch RPM The engine speed will hold at the RPM that was set in the Launch RPM Set up screen NOTE Messages will appear in the Driver Information Display DID to inform the driver if one or more of the above conditions have not been met 8 When conditions 4 through 7 have been met the Driver Information Display DID will read Launch Ready Release Clutch Release the clutch quickly and STARTING AND OPERATING 393 continue to hold wide open throttle to launch execute shifts Refer to Manual Transmission Shifting in this section for further information Release the clutch and continue to hold wide open throttle to launch 9 Keep the vehicle pointed straight Launch control will be active until the vehicle reaches 62 mph 100 km h at which point the ESC system
399. resence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle to vehicle distance is detected Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead Always be aware which mode is selected To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Normal Fixed Speed Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed push the SET or SET button and release Release the accel erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed Once a speed has been set a message CRUISE CON TROL SET TO will appear indicating what speed was set This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed When the Normal Fixed Speed Electronic Speed Control is set you can increase speed by pushing the SET button The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under standing Your Instrument Panel for more information The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of U S mph or Metric km h units ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 U S Speed mph e Pushing the SET button once will result a 1 mph increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the
400. ring column and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles after releasing the multifunction lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles and then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the A AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature NOTE For vehicle equipped with rain sensor auto wipes please note that in addition to the 10 seconds the headlights can also turn on if the Rain Sensing feature is ON and the front wipers complete a minimum of 5 wipe cycles within 60 seconds In this case auto wipes the headlights will turn off if no wipes
401. rm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle push and release the START STOP button 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature the message Remote start active Push start button will display in the Driver Information Display DID until you push the START button Cancel Remote Start Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following occur The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm Any engine warning lights come on Low Fuel Light turns on The hood is opened The hazard switch is pushed The shift lever is moved out of PARK The brake pedal is pushed DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward To unlock each door pull the door lock knob on each door trim panel upward 0218042171 Door Lock Knob THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WARNING Continued If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door the door will lock Therefore make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door WARNING For personal security and safety in the event of a collision lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard agains
402. road traffic and weather condi tions vehicle speed distance to the vehicle ahead and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road condi tions Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your ve hicle Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury e The ACC system Does not react to pedestrians oncoming vehicles and stationary objects e g a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle e Cannot take street traffic and weather condi tions into account and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions Continued WARNING Continued Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings You should switch off the ACC system When driving in fog heavy rain heavy snow sleet heavy traffic and complex driving situations i e in highway construction zones When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp when driving on roads that are winding icy snow covered slippery or have steep uphill or downhill slopes e When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes e When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation The speed control buttons located on the right side of the steering wheel operates the ACC system 160 UNDERSTAND
403. ronic equip ment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference Continued Continued 408 STARTING AND OPERATING es WARNING Continued The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires Modifi cation may result in degraded ABS performance Anti Lock Brake Warning Light The amber Anti Lock Brake Warning Light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake System Warning Light is not on If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light repaired as soon as possible Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system
404. round connection and personal injury could result damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the remote positive post of the vehicle with the dis Jump Starting Procedure charged battery 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper WARNING cable to the positive post of the booster battery Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the result in personal injury or property damage due to negative post of the booster battery battery explosion 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 479 WARNING 2 Disconnect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark 3 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from th iti t of th b could cause the battery to explode and could result in a a personal injury Only use the specific ground point do 4 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper not use any other exposed metal parts cable from the remote positive post of the vehicle with the discharged battery 5 Sta
405. rst turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your autho rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners Continued WARNING Continued e Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfer ing with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with t
406. rt the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 6 Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables CAUTION in the reverse sequence If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle x you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets Disconnecting The Jumper Cables draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not 1 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable use ie cellular devices etc Eventually if from the remote negative post of the vehicle with Plugged in long enough without engine operation the discharged battery Continued 480 WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES ME CAUTION Continued the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved using a rocking motion Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels For vehicles with automatic transmission press and hold the lock button on the shift lever Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE with automatic transmission or FIRST GEAR and REVERSE with manual transmission while gently pressing the accelerator
407. s Refer to Driver Information Display DID in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for Main Menu Sub Menu selectable items and navigation 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The Performance Features include the following e 0 60 mph 0 100 km h Timer Best Last Current Reaction Timer e 0 100 mph 0 161 km h Timer Best Last Current Reaction Timer e 1 8 Mile 200 meters Timer Best Last Current Reaction Timer 1 4 Mile 400 meters Timer Best Last Current Reaction Timer Braking Distance Distance From Speed Current G Forces Peak G Forces Lap Timer Lap History Will list the last 5 lap with the best lap highlighted in green Top Speed E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 The following describes each feature and its operation 0 60 mph 0 100 km h When selected this screen displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph 0 to 100 km h within 10 seconds The feature will ready when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph 0 km h The word READY will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin e Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph 100 km h in less then 10 seconds To clear the vehicle s best last and current 0 60 mph 0 100 km h time push and hold the OK button for two seconds 0 to 100 mph 0 to 161 km h When selected this screen displays the
408. s CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 477 WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as rings watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or Remote Battery Posts Locations sparks away from the battery 2221 060836876 1 Remote Positive 4 Post 2 Remote Negative Post 1 Set the parking brake shift into PARK automatic transmission or 1st gear manual transmission and place the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 478 WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES Sx 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the ee parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF Failure to follow these procedures could result in WARNING Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this Connecting The Jumper Cables could establish a g
409. s A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals STARTING AND OPERATING 447 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above wheel housings 15 mph 24 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the DID will display a SERVICE TPM 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle Vehicles With Compact Spare 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the DID will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road minimum of five seconds and then display dashes tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warn in place of the pressure value ing limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the TPM Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the DID will still display the low pressure values in a different
410. s are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami nants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi tions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525 e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu Special Care lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive and Tar Remover to remove near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR a month Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect ae 3 e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges your paint
411. s ec oe ms 512 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 515 Coolant Capacity c em eee d 547 548 Coolant Level 513 517 Disposal Of Used Coolant 517 Drain Flush And 514 INSPECHiON uec cede ihe oe Te WRI aes 517 Points To Remember 518 Pressure Cap RR ERR RR ES 516 Radiator Cap 2 4 Y ee ita Y eds 516 Selection Of Coolant Antifreeze Corrosion Cruise Control Speed Control Crise LACIE aed a aaa ath al ae Y Cupholders tr RR eyes Customer 502 INDEX ees Customer Programmable Features 269 Data Recorder Event 70 Daytime Brightness Interior Lights 145 Daytime Running 140 Dealer 497 Deck Lid Emergency Release 42 Deck Lid Power 40 Defroster Rear 216 Defroster 5 1 94 Delay Intermittent 146 Diagnostic System Onboard 494 Dimmer Switch 142 Dipsticks Ol Engine ga 498 Disabled Vehicle Towing 485 486 487 Disposal Antifreeze Eng
412. s in increased operating temperatures of the engine transmission clutch driveline and brake system This increased operating temperature may affect Noise Vibration Harshness NVH countermeasures de signed into your vehicle New components may need to be installed to return the system to the original NVH performance Recommended tire pressure for track use e Challenger Charger 40 psi hot 32 psi front 30 psi rear cold Track Burnishing Your Brakes To avoid green lining fade during track use the brake pads and rotors must have a thermal burnish for factory installed components or when new brake friction com ponents are installed 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 Utilize one track session to burnish brakes by driving at 75 speed Brake at approximately 0 60 0 80g without ABS intervention Lap the track in this manner until you start smelling the brakes Continue for another lap at speed then do a two lap cool down with minimal brake applica tion Make sure the brakes are not smoking If they are do another cool down lap Do not continue for more than one full burnishing lap after you start smelling the brakes Do not get them smoking heavily This will get them too hot and will negatively affect their life in future track use Allow the vehicle to sit and cool in the paddock for at least 30 minutes If an infrared thermal gun is avail able allow the rotors to cool
413. s required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Sg Transmission Temperature Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Transmission Temperature Warning Light This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot This may occur with severe usage If this light turns on safely pull over and stop them vehicle Then shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off CAUTION WARNING Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera If you continue operating the vehicle when the ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi severe transmission damage or transmission failure nated you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 Electric Power Steering Fail Warning If Equipped Red Telltale Light What It Means Electric Power Steering Fail Warning This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS Power Steer
414. safe operation Failure to button results in an increase of 1 mph follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the DID Metric Speed kmlh To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed While ACC is set you can increase the set speed by pressing the SET 4 button Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the The drivers preferred units can be selected through the button results in an increase of 1 km h instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under standing Your Instrument Panel for more information ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km h increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the DID To Decrease Speed While ACC is set the set speed can be decreased by pressing the SET button The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under standing Your Instrument Panel for more information The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U S mph or Metric km h U S Speed mph Pressing the SET button once
415. screen the following settings will be available e Channel Skip SiriusXM can be programmed to skip channels To make your selection press the Channel Skip button on the touchscreen select the channels you would like to skip e Subscription Information New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio Following the expiration of the free ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re subscribe Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U S residents only Restore Settings After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available Restore Settings When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings To restore the settings to their default setting press the Restore Settings button A pop up will appear asking Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default select Yes to restore or Cancel to exit Once the settings are restored a pop up appears stating sett
416. sec onds The vehicle doors will lock the parking lights will flash and horn will chirp twice if E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE f an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and then shut down 10 seconds later e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode The engine can be started two consecutive times with the RKE transmitter However the ignition must be activated by pushing the START STOP button twice or the ignition must be placed in the ON RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors or unlock the vehicle using Passive Entry via the door handles and disarm the Vehicle Security Ala
417. shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal if any slack so that it is comfort able and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt
418. si 4 8 Bar The Pressure Gauge 3 will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi 4 8 Bar to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty 2 The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi ately after the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver side latch pillar recommended pressure Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge 3 If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated push the Defla tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes 1 Push the Power Button 4 to turn off the Tire Service Kit 2 Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle 1 and place the sticker on the instru ment panel ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 473 3 Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from D Drive Vehicle the valve stem reinstall the cap on the fitting at the I diately after injecti lant and inflating the tire end of the hose and place the Tire Service Kit in the OL Ea AT DE OS drive the vehicle 5 miles 8 km or 10
419. smission into PARK Apply the parking brake Start the engine Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one half turn to the left Push the ESC Off button located in the lower switch bank below the climate control four times within twenty seconds The ESC Off Indicator Light should turn on and turn off two times 412 STARTING AND OPERATING 7 Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional slighty more than one half turn to the right 8 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position If the sequence was com pleted properly the ESC Off Indicator Light will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled 9 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected the TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel s and or reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS Brake Limited Differ ential BLD functions similar to a limited slip differen tial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and E
420. speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Metric Speed kmlh e Pushing the SET button once will result in a 1 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km h 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then continue to decrease until the button is released then the new set speed will be established the new set speed will be established To Decrease Speed Metric Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can de Pushing the SET button once will result in a 1 km h crease speed by pushing the SET button decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the The drivers preferred units can be selected through the button results in a decrease of 1 km h instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under 6 Jf the button is continually pushed the set speed will standing Your Instrument Panel for more information continue to decrease until the button is released then The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen the new set speed will be established speed unit of U S mph or Metric km h U S Spee
421. sposal i esee oes Ens 501 Filter M 502 549 550 Filter Disposal ce csse rera 501 Materials Added 500 Pressure Warning Light 234 499 547 548 Syntheti iie esu dod wee 500 ViSCOSILY 222222224448 tan 499 547 548 Oil Filter Change cer nd baie cag weal 502 Oil Filter Selection 502 Oil Pressure Lights s eee enm e 234 Onboard Diagnostic 494 Operating 494 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview 110 Overhead 195 Overheating ENGINE is ko eoe ere 462 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 574 Paddle Sh fter 4 esee eee 381 SR Strut ua ER T ETE REI RE UNE S 381 Paint 24 3 045 9420 Pu quU bed pde 524 5 ex ES LEG 24 Parking Brakes sem 402 ParkSense System 184 Passenger Seat Fasy ios ac ee PRG 130 Passing Light eee 142 259 289 e or ave Barebone oho eo hee 90 Placard Tire And Loading Information 427 Power Brakes ue heath Brae et hte 405 Deck Lid Release
422. sture from the WARNING air resulting in a lower boiling point This may e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master Continued cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro longed braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521 Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture Clutch Hydraulic System Manual Transmission If Equipped The clutch
423. system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds normal range overheated Setting The Following Distance In ACC The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between four bars longest three bars long two bars medium and one bar short Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead This distance setting displays in the DID 0324049880 Distance Setting 4 Bars Longest ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 0324049879 0324049878 Distance Setting 3 Bars Long Distance Setting 2 Bars Medium 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 0324049877 Distance Setting 1 Bar Short To increase the distance setting press the Distance Set ting Increase button and release Each time the button is pressed the distance setting increases by one bar longer To decrease the distance setting press the Distance Setting Decrease button and release Each time the button is pressed the distance setting decreases by one bar shorter If there is no vehicle ahead the vehicle will maintain the set speed If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane the DID displays the Sensed Vehicle Indica tor icon and the system adjusts vehicle speed automati cally to maintain the distance setting regardless of the set speed The vehicle will then maintain the set distance u
424. t e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance 576 WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning o
425. t Oil Pressure Warning Light This light indicates low engine oil pressure If the light turns on while driving stop the ve hicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood Oil Temperature Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Oil Temperature Warning Light E This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected while the engine is running the light will either stay on or flash de pending on the nature of the problem Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains on with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light continues to flash when the engine is running immediate service i
426. t clicking sound as well as some related motor noises ABS is activated during braking when the system detects one or more wheels begins to lock Road conditions such as ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa tion s STARTING AND OPERATING 407 You also may experience the following when ABS acti WARNING Continued vates can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capa bility Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals The clicking sound of solenoid valves Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just e Aslight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop e The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning The ABS motor noise it may continue to run for a short time after the stop Brake pedal pulsations These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING e The ABS contains sophisticated elect
427. t does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY IF EQUIPPED This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required 402 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE This system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK or REVERSE manual transmission only position When the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch is in the ON position RUN position with Keyless Enter N Go the Brake Warning Light in the instru ment cluster will illuminate NOTE When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to m
428. t please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor mation that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintain ing servicing and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward lan guage with illustrations diagrams and charts IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshoot ing and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance proce dures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips en F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 575 Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web a
429. t wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be re placed immediately Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front 3 When the seat belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 2 seat and next to your arm in the rear seat for vehicles equipped with a rear seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap Pulling Out The Latch Plate Inserting Latch Plate m Buckie Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision M Positioning The Lap Belt Position the
430. t 500 miles of engine break in Preconditions e Launch control should not be used on public roads Always check track conditions and the surrounding area e Launch Control is not available for the first 500 miles of the vehicle s life e Launch Control should only be used when the engine and transmission are at operating temperature e Launch Control is intended to be used on dry paved road surfaces only Use on slippery or loose surfaces may cause damage to vehicle components and is not recommended Automatic Transmission If Equipped Launch Control is only available when the following procedure is followed 1 Push the LAUNCH button on the center stack switch bank NOTE Pushing the SRT button on the center stack or pressing the Apps button on the touchscreen are two other options to access launch control features Please refer to Drive Modes in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information 2 Press the Launch RPM Set Up button on the touch screen This screen will allow you to adjust your launch RPM s for optimum launch traction STARTING AND OPERATING 391 3 Press the Activate Launch Mode button on the 9 Keep the vehicle pointed straight touchscreen Launch control will be active until the vehicle reaches 4 Make sure the vehicle is not moving 62 mph 100 km h at which point the ESC system will MP return to its current ESC mode 5 Make sure
431. t indicates a possible brake hydraulic sys tem malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is necessary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
432. t to position the seat belt on the child correctly WARNING Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back In a crash the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly which may result in serious injury or death A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an X Below Child Restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Weight of the LATCH Seat Belt Only LATCH Seat Belt Top Child Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Restraint Only Top Tether Anchor Rear Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Rear Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Forward Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Forward Facing More than X 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children LATCH Restraint System Anchor Tether LATCH The next generation of child safety M J 022668173 Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH equipped child seats There are two lower anchorages locat
433. t vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage When leaving the vehicle always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode re move the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Power Door Locks The power door lock switch is located on each door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors 0218042166 Power Door Lock Switch The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry system Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for further information If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition is on and either door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle Turning off
434. tem Security Alarm 19 Alterations Modifications 7 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 514 547 548 Disposal sose 2344 be Sok RED 517 Anti Lock Brake System 5 406 Anti Lock Warning Light 246 Appearance 524 Arming System Security Alarm 19 Assist Hill Start 2 0 eee ee ee 409 Auto Down Power Windows 39 Automatic Door 32 33 Automatic 5 138 Automatic High 138 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 324 331 Automatic Transmission 374 521 523 Adding Fluid eR 523 549 551 A tos ck bebe e EET 381 Fluid And Filter 523 Fluid Change ars Rem arm Rea 523 Fluid Level 522 Fluid Types esse cise 549 551 Special Additives 5 3 sees Re eed 522 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode 380 AXutosticle we eren e RR dre arto 381 Auto Unlock 33 Axle Fluid 549 551 Axle Lubrication 549 551 Battery P EE 233 503 Charging System 233 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 25 Lo
435. ternal engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types is not recom mended and can result in cooling system damage If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency have a authorized dealer drain flush and refill with OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 as soon as possible Cooling System Pressure Caps The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces NOTE Be sure you do not mix the engine coolant system pressure cap with the intercooler system pressure cap these caps are not interchangeable MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517 WARNING Do not open hot engine cooling system Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antif
436. th an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other e Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling e The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion e If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be fore connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505 Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING Continued For best possible performance your air conditioner should The air conditioning system contains refrigerant be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the under high pressure To avoid risk of personal start of each warm season This service should include injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
437. that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Adminis trator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety 574 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your paymen
438. the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child s reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of buckling it behind the child re straint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it Do not lock the seat belt Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re straint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Child restraint anchorages are designed to with stand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 WARNING Continued Lap Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child child restraints Under no circumstances are they
439. the engine is running A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full STARTING AND OPERATING 455 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap message will display in the Driver Information Display DID If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further infor mation VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the Vehicle Certification Label This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Ra
440. the faceplate or press the AUTO button on the touchscreen 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas senger temperature buttons on the faceplate or but tons on the touchscreen Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automati cally maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the temperature You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e It is not necessary to move the temperature settings The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the Uconnect customer programmable fea ture Refer to the Uconnect System Settings in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode Manual Operation Override The system allows for manual selection of blower speed air distribution mode A C status and recirculation control The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control The fan will now operate at a fixed s
441. the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO position When the system is on the headlight time delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF position To turn the automatic system off move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature is set to ON In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature NOTE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Automatic High Beam If Equipped The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides increased forward lighting at night by automat ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approachi
442. the mirror to move Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster if equipped Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Vanity Mirrors A vanity mirror is located on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward Illuminated Vanity Mirrors An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward The light turns on automatically Close the mirror cover to turn off the light Illuminated Vanity Mirror es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Slide On Rod And Extender Features Of Sun Visor To use the Slide On Rod feature of the sun visor rotate the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is parallel to the side window grabbing the sun visor with your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the desired position To use the extender feature of the sun visor grab the extender which is located at the rear of the visor and pull rearward Slide On Rod Extender 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE BLIND SPOT MONITORING BSM IF EQUIPPED The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system uses two radar based sensors loc
443. the touchscreen or press SRT Pages in the top left of the touchscreen while in Drive Modes Press the desired button on the touchscreen to access that specific Performance Page WARNING Measurement of vehicle statistics with the SRT Per formance Pages is intended for off highway or off road use only and should not be done on any public roadways It is recommended that these features be used in a controlled environment and within the limits of the law The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the Performance Pages must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which can jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The Performance Pages include the following The following describes each feature and its operation e Home Home e Timers 1 36 W 64 out Performance Pages e Gauges 1 e Gauges 2 G Force e Engine G Force Engine SRT Performance Pages Home When Home is selected the following features will be available e series of six images which can be selected by the user E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 e A left and right arrow to allow the user to scroll through vehicle images e A short cut to the SRT Drive Modes feature Timers 1 14 E Performance Pages FM 97 1 HD1 e tiriverts RT com Current tion T
444. ther overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool or the 4 minutes duration is expired whichever come first If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle If the tem perature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for ser vice Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further infor mation UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 Charging System Warning Light Red Telltale What It Means Light Charging System Warning Light This light shows the status of the electrical charging system This light illuminates when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s nonessential electrical devices or in crease engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDI ATELY See an authorized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emer gencies 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Oil Pressure Warning Light Red Telltale What It Means Ligh
445. tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake master cylinder and power steering and add as needed Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change Change the engine oil filter Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle 556 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se Maintenance Chart ooo osL 8 000 082 x 3 0000 2 x ooo seL 8 ooo oez x 0026 00022 00092 amp 000 012 000 021 amp 00002 O00 vLL 000 061 00080 00098 00020 00094 00096 000 091 00006 S 000961 000 S 0000 1 00097 00061 00027 amp 000921 00099 00004 00009 000001 000 00006 x oo0 ep 00008 x o00 zp amp 00097 x 00096 000 09 x 00006 S 000 0S x 000 2 amp 0000 x 0008 9 00096 00021 00002 0009 00091 S m 4 2 82 e lt 1 89455 OZ OE amp ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 557 00001 8 ooo osz x 3 0000 000861 8 000962 N ooozeL o00 0zz
446. time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to 100 mph 0 to 161 km h within 20 seconds The feature will ready when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph 0 km h The word READY will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 0 to 100 mph 0 to 161 km h in less then 20 seconds e To clear the vehicle s best last and current 0 to 100 mph 0 to 161 km h time push and hold the OK button for two seconds 1 8 Mile 200 Meters When selected this screen displays the time it takes the vehicle to travel 1 8 mile within 15 seconds and the vehicle s speed when it reaches 1 8 mile 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The feature will ready when the vehicle is at 0 mph 0 km h The word READY will flash when condi tions are met for the event to begin Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1 8 mile 200 meters in less then 15 seconds To clear the vehicle s best 1 8 mile 200 meters run push and hold the OK button for five seconds 1 4 Mile 400 Meters When selected this screen displays the time it takes the vehicle to travel 1 4 mile within 25 seconds and the vehicle s speed when it reaches 1 4 mile 400 meters The feature will ready when the vehicle is at 0 mph 0 km h The word READY will flash when condi tions are met for the event to begin e Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1 4 mile
447. ting GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the drivers side B Pillar or the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information Name of manufacturer Month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front 456 STARTING AND OPERATING Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN Type of Vehicle Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed
448. tire seat belt is extracted 3 Allow the seat belt to retract As the seat belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 WARNING Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bag System C t The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR fea Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag ture any other seat belt function is not working System components properly when checked according to the proce Occupant Restraint Controller ORC dures in the Service Manual e Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could Air Bag Warning Light 2 increase the risk of injury in collisions Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats The locked mode is only used to install rear facing or forward facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining Advanced Front Air Bags the child e Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolsters Supplemental Side Air Bags e Front and Side Impact Sensors
449. to 200 F 93 3 C before going back out 5 6 8 There should be a thin ashy layer when inspecting the pads installed in the caliper If the ash layer is more than the thickness of the brake pad material this is an indication of too aggressive of a burnish Sometimes a second burnish session is required If the brake pads start smelling in the next track session reduce speed and braking deceleration to burnish targets and follow steps 2 through 4 New brake pads installed on old rotors still need to be burnished New rotors installed with old pads should be burnished at the track or street driven for 300 city miles to develop an adequate lining transfer layer on the rotor surface prior to track use Rotors that pulsate during track use should be re placed Resurfacing of the rotors is not recommended as it removes mass from the rotor reducing its thermal ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 capacity Resurfacing also thins the rotor cheek mak ing it less robust and increasing the likelihood of pulsation in further track use SRT Performance Pages Performance Pages is an application that provides a display for performance indicators as received from the Instrument Cluster that will help you gain familiarity with the capabilities of your SRT vehicle in real time To access the SRT Performance Pages press the Apps button on the touchscreen then press the SRT Perfor mance button on
450. to ride in a cargo area with an oil level below the add mark can cause severe inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed engine damage SAFETY TIPS Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat Transporting Passengers belts NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and AREA using a seat belt properly WARNING Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Continued Breathing it can make you unconscious and can Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 WARNING Continued eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area f you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate rear doors open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to
451. to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released NOTE If the multifunction lever is held in the flash to pass position for more than 20 seconds the high beams will shut off ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console Each light is turned on by pressing the lens Press the lens a second time to turn off the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent 033309453 Overhead Console Interior Lights The interior lights come on when a door is opened To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE open This includes the glove box light and the trunk light To restore interior light operation either place the ignition in the ON RUN position or cycle the light switch Dimmer Controls The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located
452. ton is located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display To turn the FCW system OFF press the forward collision button once to turn the system OFF led turns on To turn the FCW system back ON press the forward collision button again to turn the system ON led turns off UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 Changing the FCW status to Off prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you NOTE The FCW system state is kept in memory from one key cycle to the next If the system is turned OFF it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted Changing FCW Status The FCW Sensitivity Settings are programmable through the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation The default status of FCW is the Far setting in the On setting this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time to avoid a possible collision Changing the FCW status to the Near setting allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer This setting provides less reaction time than the Far setting which allows for a more dynamic driving experience NOTE e The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver aft
453. trol can be accessed by pushing the Launch Control button on the instrument panel switch bank or pushing the SRT button on the instrument panel switch bank then selecting the Race Options button on the touchscreen Press the Activate Launch Control button on the touchscreen to activate the feature Press the 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Launch RPM Set Up to set the holding RPM Launch Mode can be turned on or off by either pushing the Launch Control button on the instrument panel switch bank if activated or by pressing the Cancel Launch Mode button on the touchscreen NOTE Launch RPM Set Up cannot be accessed unless Launch Mode is deactivated 1 34 Launch RPM Set Up Launch Contro Shift Light CD PA Radio 0416081339 Launch RPM Set Up Manual Transmission To adjust the Launch RPM drag the slider bar or press the arrows on the touchscreen to adjust the holding RPM The launch RPM limits will vary between the automatic transmissions 1500 3500 RPM and manual transmis sions 2000 4500 RPM UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 For further information refer to Drive Modes in Start Driver Information Display DID Pressing the Shift ing and Operating Light RPM Set Up button on the touchscreen will take Shift Light you to the Shift Light RPM Set Up screen 11 03 Shift Light RPM Set Up info 1 35 bend Options
454. ts be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage No Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints If the center posi tion does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an out board position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Can the rear facing child restraint touch the Yes The child seat may touch the back of the back of the front passenger seat front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact See your child restraint owner s manual for more in formation Can the head restraints be removed Yes Center only may be removed Locating LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages round bars that found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback below the anchorage sym bols on the seatback They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion 0226081559 LATCH Anchorages 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Locating Tether Anchorages There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located in the panel be tween the rear seatback and the rear window They are found under a plastic cover with the tethe
455. ult the dealer or an experienced radio technician for help CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather This system can be operated through either the controls on the instru ment panel or through the Uconnect system display When the Uconnect system is in different modes Radio Player Settings More etc the driver and passenger tem perature settings will be indicated at the top of the display General Overview Buttons On The Faceplate The buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect screen Automatic Climate Controls Buttons On The Faceplate Buttons On The Touchscreen Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect system screen 0415075107 Uconnect 8 4 Automatic Temperature Controls Buttons On The Touchscreen Button Descriptions Applies To Both Buttons On The Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen 1 MAX AIC Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when MAX A C is ON Performing UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 this function again will cause the MAX A C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A C indicator will turn off 2 A C Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when A C is ON Performing this function again will cause the A C operation to switch into manual mode and the A C indicator
456. ume UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 Pushing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM AUX etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pushing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset button 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Media Mode Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the selected media AUX Bluetooth SD Card Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the current track begins to play If you push the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES Under certain conditions the mobile device being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile devi
457. utton on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting had been selected Lights After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected it allows adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off To change the Headlights Off Delay setting press the or button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval and choose either 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec or 90 seconds es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 Headlight Illumination On Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status press the or button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval Headlights With Wipers If Equipped When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on ap proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press the Headlights With Wipers but ton on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting has
458. utton on the touchscreen to access the selectable options In the Custom Mode Set Up screen the individual current configuration will be displayed Select which mode suits your driving needs for a custom driving experience Custom Mode Set Up Info Within the Custom Mode Set Up screen press the info button on the touchscreen then use the left right arrows to scroll through all the available Drive Mode systems giving you a description of their operation and current configuration Power If Equipped With 6 2L Supercharged Engine 10 10 Power Modifies the power output of the engine to 700 500 HP Modifies the power output of the engine to 500 Power 6 2L Supercharged Engine Only e 700 Press the 700 button on the touchscreen to modify the output power of the engine to 700 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 NOTE This selection is only available with the RED RKE Key Fob e 500 Press the 500 button on the touchscreen to modify the output power of the engine to 500 NOTE This selection is available with the RED or BLACK RKE Key Fob 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Transmission If Equipped With 8 Speed Transmission 01 33 lt Transmission TRACK Fastest possible shift speeds strongest comfort trade off SPORT Faster shift speeds some comfort STREET Balance of shift speed and shift control Transmission e Track Pr
459. uttons 4 the following buttons mounted on the steering A Using the UP or DOWN arrows allows you to cycle through the Main Menu Items Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title V area LEFT And RIGHT Arrow Buttons Using the LEFT or RIGHT arrow buttons lt 1 allows you to cycle through the submenu items of the Main menu item E gt DID Controls Holding the UP DOWN or LEFT RIGHT arrow buttons will loop the user through the currently selected menu or options pre sented on the screen UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 Main menu and submenu s wrap for continuous scrolling e Upon returning to a main menu the last submenu screen viewed within that main menu will be dis played OK Button For Digital Speedometer e Pushing the OK button changes units MPH or km h For Screen Setup and Vehicle Settings e OK button allows user to enter menu and submenus e Within each submenu layer the UP DOWN arrows will allow the user to select the item of interest e Pushing the OK button makes the selection and a confirmation screen will appear returning the user to the 1st page of the submenu Pushing the LEFT arrow button will exit each sub menu layer and return to the main menu For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus and new Perfor mance Timers Information is reset by pushing and holding the OK button Engine Oil Life Reset Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equippe
460. ve hicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected ee e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN e Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped Yellow Telltale What It Means Light Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light g This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control ESC is off OFF Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light oe Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low What It Means Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended va
461. ve a Screen Off and Back buttons on the faceplate Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the Uconnect screen Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate a second time to turn the screen on Push the Back button on the faceplate to exit out of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system Buttons On The Touchscreen Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect display Customer Programmable Features Uconnect 8 4 Settings Press the Apps button then press the Settings button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display Units Voice Clock Safety amp Driving Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks Auto On Comfort Engine Off Options Audio Phone Bluetooth SiriusXM Setup Restore Settings Clear Personal Data and System Information NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time Depending on the vehicles options feature settings may vary UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 When making a selection press the button on the touch screen to enter the desired mode Once in the desired mode press and release the preferred setting option until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Once the setting is com plete either press the Back Arrow button on the touch screen to return to the
462. very bottle if equipped with the 6 2L Supercharged engine tubing for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of coolant from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant antifreeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT RE MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT 514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill Selection Of Coolant NOTE Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains visible sediment have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant antifreeze conforming to MS 90032 NOTE If equipped with the 6 2L Supercharged engine the intercooler must be vacuum flushed and filled If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Mai
463. ways make sure the keyless ignition node is in OFF mode remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle Continued 360 STARTING AND OPERATING Manual Transmission If Equipped Apply the parking brake place the shift lever in NEU TRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking igni tion system It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor Normal Starting With Integrated Key Manual Transmission Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Press the clutch pedal fully to the floor and cycle the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds place the ignition in the OFF position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure WARNING Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic con verter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow the procedure carefully Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Automatic Transmission If Equipped
464. will return to its current ESC mode Launch control will abort before launch completion display Launch Aborted in the cluster and return to ESC Full ON under any the following conditions The brake is applied during launch The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer moving in a straight line The ESC OFF button is pushed to change the ESC system to another mode NOTE After launch control has been aborted ESC will return to its current ESC mode CAUTION Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels are spinning and do not have traction Damage to the transmission may occur Guidelines For Track Use NOTE Because of the extreme conditions encountered during track use any damage or wear associated with track use is not covered by warranty If your SRT vehicle is equipped with Drive Modes they will alter the vehicle s performance in various driving 394 STARTING AND OPERATING e e situations It is recommended that your vehicle oper ates in SPORT or TRACK modes during the track event Prior to each track event day verify all fluids are at the correct levels Refer to Fluid Capacities in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information Prior to each track event verify the front and rear brake pads have more than pad thickness remain ing If the brake pads require changing please burnish prior to track outing at full pace At the conclusion of each track event
465. witch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the front windows closed open the front windows to gether to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Ignition Off Operation The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature NOTE Ignition Off time is programmable through the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlets that can be used to power cel
466. without stop P ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near e When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting be a spinning wheel no matter what the speed tween DRIVE 1ST GEAR and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or MANUAL PARK RELEASE 8 SPEED drivetrain damage may result TRANSMISSION WARNING Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no trans Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the mission shifting occurring parking brake before activating the Manual Park Continued 482 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Continued Release Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmis sion will not shift out of PARK such as a dead battery a Manual Park Release is available Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release 1 Firmly apply the parking brake 2 Remove the console storage bin to access the Manual Park Release lever 0615041316 Console Storage Bin 3 Using a small screwdriver or similar tool
467. ww tc gc ca eng motorvehiclesafety safedrivers childsafety index 53 htm THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size Height Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have out grown the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Forward Facing Child Restraint with a five point Harness facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Larger Children Children who have out grown their forward facing child restraint but are too small to properly fit the vehicle s seat belt Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve hicle seat belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger who have out grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Vehicle Seat Belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rear facing in the vehicle until they are two years old o
468. x 000 921 amp 000012 x e 000 021 amp 000902 x 000 000 061 x 000801 8 00098 ooo zor S 00091 000 96 000091 x 0006 2 000 0 x 000 8 2 00096 00087 00096 00027 amp 00001 00099 00004 00009 000 0 ooo rs 00006 0008 9 00008 002 S 000 07 x 00096 9 00009 00006 00005 000 2 2 00006 0008 9 00006 ooo zt 00002 0009 00091 G o T a 99 92585 t 25 8 899 89584 5 29995 99855985 OS OE rs82o65002990E amp 558 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 000 08 8 ooo osz 3 0000 000861 8 o00 0ez ooo zer o00 0zz 000 921 amp 000912 000 021 amp 00002 000 061 000801 8 000 081 0020 S 00091 0006 0009 00006 000961 000 8 00000 00084 100001 00024 amp 000921 00099 8 00008 00009 8 000001 000 0006 0008 00008 02 00007 00096 8 00009 00096 8 00006 00 2 00007 0008 00006 00041 9 00092 0009 00091 yl oa E 558 558 DEP Eius s 6E 88 589 5845 854 8 ee MAIN
469. x 000 8 2 00096 00087 9 00096 00027 Q 00002 00099 00004 00009 000 0 0008 00006 x 0008 2 00008 002 S 0009 00096 9 00009 x 00006 00005 000 2 amp 00006 0008 00006 x ooo zt 00002 0009 00091 V E B a 5552 9 Zo 55 9 5 t9 Zo2S 0525 joz os zz amp 8osEZS z8 es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 563 000 08 8 ooo osz 3 0000 x 000861 8 000962 N 000 2 000 0 2 amp 000 921 amp 000012 000021 amp 000902 00 4 00061 000801 8 00098 ooo zor S 00091 000 96 000091 x 0006 2 000 0 000 8 2 00096 00087 00096 ooo zz amp 000021 00099 00004 00009 000 0 ooo rs 000 06 0008 9 oo0 08 x o00 Zv amp 000 07 00096 9 00009 00006 00005 000 2 2 00006 0008 9 00006 00021 amp 00002 0009 000 5590 L l 5 2552 52 98 o 895 25 28S ososs oe 550 2 _ 6 Boece 62 5005 9 06 JOSS SSESSRSSES C SBE 564 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ooo ost 8 ooo osz 000 3 00002 000861 8 00062 ooo zer oooozz 000921
470. ximum cooling perfor mance Press and release to toggle between MAX A C and the prior settings The button on the touchscreen illuminates when MAX A C is ON In MAX A C the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A C operation to switch to the prior settings and the MAX A C indicator will turn off Recirculation When outside air contains smoke odors or c high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected Press the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 NOTE In cold weather use of recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The recirculation feature may be unavailable button on the touchscreen greyed out if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield On systems with Manual Climate Controls the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Automatic Temperature Control ATC Automatic Operation 1 Push the AUTO button on
471. y not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration Le pr sent appareil est conforme aux CNR d Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de li cence L exploitation est autoris e aux deux conditions suivantes 1 l appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil lage et 2 l utilisateur de l appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radio lectrique subi m me si le brouillage est susceptible d en compromettre le fonctionnement NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful inter ference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation e If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Cons
472. your Uconnect Supplement Manual Eco Mode Press the Eco button on the touchscreen on the SRT jPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED Drive Modes main menu Eco mode modifies the vehi cle s engine and transmission settings to provide im proved fuel economy at a trade off with acceleration This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Located in the front storage area of the center console iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod this feature allows an iPod MP3 player or an external and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may USB device to be connected to the audio system not fully support the iPod control features Please visit dd Apple s website for software updates For further information refer to the Uconnect User s Manual STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches USB AUX SD Card Ports 1 Aux Jack 3 SD Card Slot 2 USB Port Ex AM 5 Remote Sound Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the vol

2016 Dodge Challenger SRT/Hellcat Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents